mailstream plus™ release 8.3.3 user’s guide for ibm® i systems

MailStream Plus™Release 8.3.3

User’s GuideFor IBM® i Systems

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without the written permission of Pitney Bowes Software Inc., One Global View, Troy, New York 12180-8399.

© 2012-2016, Pitney Bowes Software, Inc.

All rights reserved. MailStream Plus and Palletization Plus are trademarks of Pitney Bowes Software. Group 1 and the Group 1 logo are registered trademarks of Pitney Bowes Software. Pitney Bowes and “Engineering the flow of communication” are registered trademarks of Pitney Bowes, Inc. All other marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Pitney Bowes Software holds a non-exclusive license to publish and sell ZIP + 4® databases on optical and magnetic media.

The following trademarks are owned by the United States Postal Service®: CASS, CASS Certified, DPV, eLOT, FASTforward, First-Class Mail, Intelligent Mail, LACSLink, NCOALink, PAVE, PLANET Code, Postal Service, POSTNET, Post Office, RDI, SuiteLink, United States Postal Service, USPS Marketing Mail, United States Post Office, USPS, ZIP Code, and ZIP + 4. This list is not exhaustive of the trademarks belonging to the Postal Service.

Pitney Bowes Software is a non-exclusive licensee of USPS® for NCOALink® processing.

Prices for Pitney Bowes Software products, options and services are not established, controlled or approved by USPS® or United States Government. When utilizing RDI™ data to determine parcel-shipping costs, the business decision on which parcel delivery company to use is not made by the USPS® or United States Government.

Do you have a product idea? Go to pbinsight.force.com/pbideas and select your product on the left side of the page.

Pitney Bowes SoftwareDocumentation [email protected] Global ViewTroy, New York 12180-8371

[email protected] http://go.pbinsight.com/online-case-management

Support: +1 (800) 367.6950Sales: +1 (800) 327.8627www.pb.com/software/

Canada:Phone: +1 (416) 594.5200Fax: +1 (416) 594.5201

Technical Support: +1 (518) 285.7283Technical Support Fax: +1 (518) 285.6080www.pitneybowes.ca/software/

http://pbinsight.force.com/pbideas

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

http://go.pbinsight.com/online-case-management

http://www.pb.com/software/

http://www.pbinsight.ca/

http://www.pitneybowes.ca/software/

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Introducing MailStream Plus™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Introduction toMailStream Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

How MailStream Plus Helps to Prepare Your Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Introduction to Palletization Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

MailStream Plus Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

MailStream Plus Job Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

What is a “Parameter”? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

MailStream Plus: The Big Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Tag Print System™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Palletization Plus™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Manifest Reporting™ Plus Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

MAIL360™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Chapter 2: MailStream Plus Jobs - What You Should Know. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Preparing Your Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Knowing Your Input File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Steps in a MailStream Plus Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Accessing the Job Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

MailStream Plus Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Optional Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Chapter 3: Getting Started with MailStream Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

For New MailStream Plus Users: Setting Up Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Creating Your First MailStream Plus Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

The MailStream Plus Parameter Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Files Created for MailStream Plus Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Chapter 4: Defining Defaults for Print Output and Mailing Piece Attributes . . . 31

Defining the Defaults for Print Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Defining Optional Report Information: Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Types of Headers and Footers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Release 8.3.3 3 User’s Guide - IBM® i

Defining Mailing Piece Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Defining Mailing Piece Attributes: Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Chapter 5: Defining Name/Address File Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Defining Name/Address File Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Defining the Input File Layout: Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Defining the Input File Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Chapter 6: Defining the Presort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Defining the Presort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Defining the Mail Class, Mail Type, and Discounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Defining an Entry Point Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Paying the Postage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Using the Palletization Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Overriding the Presort Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Sequencing Entry Point Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Excluding Entry Point Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Automation-Compatible Presorting Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Presort Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Specifying Entry Point Parameter Group Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Add-A-Name Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Specify NDC Entry Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Specify SCF Entry Point Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Specify ADC Entry Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

More Entry Point Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Chapter 7: Defining Name/Address Record Posting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Defining MailStream Plus Output Files - The Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Posting Optional Output Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Defining Output Fields: Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Defining Individual Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Saving Your Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Chapter 8: Submitting Batch Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Setting Up a Batch Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Step 1: Generate Statistics Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Step 2: Run the Presort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Step 3: Post Name/Address Records (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Step 4: Print Reports (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Optional Steps: RTYPES Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Specifying Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Running the Parameter (“Parm”) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Running a Batch Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Reviewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100


Viewing Parameters for Your Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Chapter 9: Defining Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Defining Reports - The Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Defining Reports: Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Chapter 10: Job Setup Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Special Presorts You Can Do with MailStream Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

What is Reverse Presorting (Re-Allocation)?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Defining Reverse Presorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

First-Class Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Defining Automation Postcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Defining Automation Flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Defining Presorted Parcels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Periodicals Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Defining Automation Flats, Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

USPS Marketing Mail Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Defining a Machinable Presorted Letters Mailing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Defining Presorted (Non-Automation) Flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Defining Enhanced Carrier Route/Manual Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Package Services Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Defining Bound Printed Matter Mailings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

SCF Drop Shipment Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Other SCF Drop Shipment Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Using the DRPKEY Report Information (RP INF) Subkeyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Determine the USPS Facility Drop Site Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Using MAIL360™ to Number Intelligent Mail Barcodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

MAIL360/Intelligent Mail Barcode Parameter Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Defining MAIL360 Intelligent Mail Barcode Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Example: IM® Barcoding, USPS Marketing Mail Letter Presorts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Chapter 11: Defining Optional Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Advanced Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

Introducing Mail.dat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Required User License Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Mail.dat Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

File Naming for Media or Electronic File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Required User License Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Mail.dat Job Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Defining Processing With the MailStream Plus CHUI Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

Palletization Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

What is a Pallet? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207


How Do I Palletize the Mail? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

How Does Palletization Plus Work?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Assign Bags and/or Packages to Pallets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Palletization Plus Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Files and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

Report Information File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

Defining Palletization Plus Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

Palletization Plus Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

Pallet Tags Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Manifest Reporting Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

The USPS Manifest Mailing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Complying with USPS Manifest Mailing System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Handling Damaged and “Pulled” Mailpieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Manifest Reporting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Numbering Mailpieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Posting Output Key Line Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

Defining the Manifest Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

Handling Multiple Records Per Address with RTYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Running a Job - RTYPES Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Program MREX00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Program MRAT00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

Setting Up and Submitting an RTYPES Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

DuoSort™ Workshare Manager Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Creating Trays of Mail for Machine Presorting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

Who Benefits? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

Sample User Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

Key Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

DuoSort Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

DFWorks® Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Additional Optional Parameter Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

Chapter 12: System-Wide Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Entering Commands at the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

Run MailStream Plus Jobs with UPRUNJOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

Submit MailStream Plus Jobs with UPSBMJOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Using the Job Import Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

Example: Creating a Job that Uses an Existing Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249


1
Introducing MailStream Plus™
In this chapter...

Introduction toMailStream Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 How MailStream Plus Helps to Prepare Your Mail . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Introduction to Palletization Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 MailStream Plus Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 MailStream Plus Job Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 What is a “Parameter”? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 MailStream Plus: The Big Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Introduction toMailStream Plus

Introduction toMailStream Plus

MailStream Plus is a comprehensive system for computerized mail preparation. It presorts mailing lists according to USPS regulations, allowing you to take advantage of the maximum postal discounts before printing the reports, USPS-required forms, and bag/tray tags. Using the information that you provide, MailStream Plus calculates the number of containers for each type of mail in a mailing and how much postage is required to “drop” the mail.

The USPS requires different reports and container labels based on the class and type of mail. MailStream Plus produces the required paperwork and provides statistical analyses of your mailing. It determines the number and types of container labels required and prints those labels in the required format and quantity. MailStream Plus also reports summary statistics for each mailing. Some of these reports contain itemized postal rate calculations, showing the rate for each mail type, the number of pieces in each category, and the resulting charges.

The MailStream Plus standard defaults cover virtually all of the USPS presorting requirements, allowing you to prepare valid mailings and reducing the chances of having your mailing rejected. However, it is possible to alter the MailStream Plus defaults should your mailing require it.

How MailStream Plus Helps to Prepare Your Mail

The bottom line: MailStream Plus prepares mail and reports according to USPS regulations, reducing the time and money it costs your business to do a mailing.

It all starts with your input file. This file may contain addresses, ZIP Codes, and perhaps other information. You simply define the content and format of your input file to MailStream Plus, define your processing requirements, select some optional reports to print, and define the content of your output (processed) records. At your request, MailStream Plus can append mail handling (endorsement) data, container and bundle numbers, or even the presort level, to your output records.

MailStream Plus produces the forms that the USPS needs to verify and accept your mail, using your parameter definitions to fill in the blanks. In addition, MailStream Plus generates the reports that give the breakdown of your mailing, helping the mail shop to group, bundle, and containerize the mailpieces.


Chapter 1: Introducing MailStream Plus™

Introduction to Palletization Plus

Introduction to Palletization Plus

Palletization Plus is a separate purchase add-on to MailStream Plus. Palletization Plus was designed to help large-volume mailers — typically, mailers who are moving truckloads of mail — to transport, track, and distribute their mailpieces. Palletization Plus makes it easier to keep large units of mail together until they reach pre-determined points where they are broken down and then distributed to reach their final destinations. Palletization Plus is particularly helpful for distributing huge amounts of mail going to multiple entry points.

The best way to describe what Palletization Plus does is to use an example:

• A mailer in New York City sends a full pallet to St. Louis.

• The individual pieces on this pallet go to several Post Offices™ serviced by the St. Louis distribution center.

• Once the pallet leaves the New York loading dock, how does the mailer ensure the proper control over the mailpieces? At this point, the New York mailer has handed over control to the St. Louis distribution center.

• The mail is in good hands, because the New York mail shop used Palletization Plus. The St. Louis distribution center uses Palletization Plus reports to direct the batches of mail to the appropriate post offices. From that point, the individual mailpieces are sent to their recipients.

MailStream Plus Components

MailStream Plus is made up of a USPS Reference File, programs, an RTYPES utility, and the Palletization Plus and Manifest Reporting add-on applications.

• The USPS Reference File is a collection of files that MailStream Plus uses to calculate presorts: delivery counts; ZIP Code directory; multi-ZIP city information; USPS Zone list; routing maps; destination data; and sequencing reference data.

• RTYPES is a separate utility that allows you to divide records with multiple types of record information, generate presort data, then reattach the record data, tracking everything in the process. Without RTYPES, you would generate a presort in which each piece of data — even though in the same record — is treated as a separate piece of mail.

• Manifest Reporting Plus is a separate utility that allows mailers to print a postage fee document for all pieces in a mailing. The Manifest Report is a cross-reference to every piece in a mailing: the container in which the piece is held, the amount of postage for that piece, and whether or not the piece was “pulled” from the mailing. The Manifest Report allows you to use postal imprint indicia rather than applying live postage (meter or stamps) to each mailpiece.

• Palletization Plus, described in the previous section, allows you to transport, track, and accurately distribute large volumes of mail.

• DuoSort extends the Workshare concept to preparing mail for machine presorting either at the mailer's own facility or at another location before that mail is given to the USPS®. By doing some of the sorting in advance, mailers can save machine presorting operations time and money.

"MailStream Plus/Palletization Plus System Flow” on page 11 shows a diagram of the system.


MailStream Plus Job Basics


For a basic job, you must define the following information to MailStream Plus:

• Input file content and layout

• What to post to the output file and the reports to print

• Whether or not to write rejected records to a separate file

• Records to process

• Physical characteristics of your mailpiece.

In exchange for the information it needs to process your file, MailStream Plus:

• Generates statistics

• Performs presort calculations

• Posts records to one or more output files

• Generates forms and reports, required and optional.




Figure 1: MailStream Plus/Palletization Plus System Flow


MailStream Plus: The Big Picture

What is a “Parameter”?

The information that you supply to process a MailStream Plus job is stored in parameters. Parameters contain the “switches” and commands that allow you to:

• Set system controls

• Set program controls

• Define the location of input fields

• Define the length of input and output data

• Format output data.

Parameters are based on the old 80-column punched cards. They start with a keyword and contain columns that include options, numeric or character values, user-supplied text, or a combination of these. The fields on the parameters are positional: they must be defined in a prescribed order.

As an IBM® i user, you use the Character User Interface (CHUI) screens to define your MailStream Plus jobs. The CHUI screens build the parameters and store them in the appropriate

parameter files. On each CHUI screen, you see the name of the parameter that MailStream Plus builds (defines) for that particular screen. When you see [UHDxx] on the UPCPPX03 screen (Defaults for Print Output), this means that when you define your headers and footers, then press F6 to update/save your definition, MailStream Plus builds the UHD xx parameters for your job. Note that some screens build multiple parameters.


MailStream Plus is more than a presorting application. For example, if you provide MailStream Plus with an input file of 1,000,000 customer names and addresses, you can presort the input file into mail sequence, thereby reducing postage costs. In addition, MailStream Plus provides postage statements, qualification and mailroom reports. To compliment the base functions of MailStream Plus, Group 1 also offers the following options:

• Tag Print System™

• Palletization Plus™

• Manifest Reporting™ Plus Option

• MAIL360™

These options work together with MailStream Plus. The following sections describe how other Pitney Bowes Software applications offer you a complete mail presorting solution.




Tag Print System™

This option uses the Container tag and Pallet tag files from MailStream Plus to create printable Intelligent Mail bag, tray, and pallet tags. Barcoded container labels, barcoded mailpieces, and presorting your mail can provide significant postage savings.

Palletization Plus™

Palletization Plus is used by mailers who place mail on pallets. The application analyzes the presorted input file and determines the number of pallets, the amount of mail on each pallet, produces pallet tag files and pallet reports. The use of Palletization Plus may lead to a reduction in postage.

Manifest Reporting™ Plus Option

Manifest Reporting is used by mailers who want to mail varying weight mailpieces in the same mail job. Manifest Reporting Plus analyzes the presorted input file and provides required USPS Key Line information and manifest reports. Manifest Reporting Plus enables you to provide the USPS batch manifest reports, which reduces paper reporting.

MAIL360™

MAIL360 is used by mailers who want to interface with the MAIL360 numbering engine to automatically number and generate a 31-digit

mailpiece barcode.


2
MailStream Plus Jobs - What You Should Know
Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Preparing Your Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Knowing Your Input File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Steps in a MailStream Plus Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Accessing the Job Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Parameter Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 MailStream Plus Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Understanding the Basics

Understanding the Basics

MailStream Plus is designed to meet your most common needs when running in its default mode. However, before it can process your mailing, you must define certain information, including:

• The weight of 100 pieces in pounds

• The thickness of 100 pieces in inches

• Length of one piece in inches

• Height of one piece in inches

• The mailing's entry point; that is, the ZIP Code of the Post Office from which the mailing enters the postal system

• Type of mail (letters, flats, or parcels, for example)

• The class of mailing

• The percent of advertising in a Periodicals mailing

Ensure that you know the dimensions of your mailing pieces, the entry points, the class, and the type of mailing before proceeding.

Preparing Your Job

Before you can run a MailStream Plus job, you need to define the locations and formats of the

ZIP Code®, ZIP + 4® Code, and carrier route code in your input name/address file. To provide MailStream Plus with complete and accurate instructions, you must be familiar with the following:

• Your input name/address file layout and job requirements

• Your control language

Knowing Your Input File Format

HINT: Sort your input name/ address file into ZIP Code order to save processing time and reduce work file size.

When MailStream Plus reads your input file, it needs to know where it can find essential information on each record. This information includes the ZIP Code, ZIP + 4 add-on, Delivery Point Code add-on (DPC), and carrier route. MailStream Plus requires that you specify the starting positions of these fields. In other words, it does not matter where the information is located, as long as you tell MailStream Plus where to find it. For MailStream Plus to read your input file, it must be in the form of a sequential file.

MailStream Plus allows you to define the length of the records in your input and output files. You can change the layout of the output file by specifying what you have on the input name/address file and what you want on the output file. Your file layout (input and output files) and job requirements are translated into parameters.

Release 8.3.3 16 Reference Guide - All Platforms

Chapter 2: MailStream Plus Jobs - What You Should KnowSteps in a MailStream Plus Job

Steps in a MailStream Plus Job

MailStream Plus for the IBM® i platform builds parameter files through the options you specify in the character-based (CHUI) screen interface. Using the CHUI interface, you define the following job functions:

• Defaults for Print Output – defines the headers, footers and formatting for all reports.

• Mailing Piece Attributes – allows you to specify information about the physical characteristics of the mailpieces such as weight, volume, and thickness. For Priority Mail Cubic Pricing, define lengths in quarter-inch increments by rounding down to the nearest quarter-inch.

• Name/Address File Layout – describes the format of your input records. In this component, you tell MailStream Plus the location of various types of information, such as the ZIP Code, in the input record.

• Presort Definition – allows you to specify the class and type of mail, such as First-Class™ letters or Package Services.

• Name/Address Record Posting – allows you to define the layout of your output records by specifying the location of mailing data in the records.

• MAIL360 – automates the process for creating unique serial numbers for full-service Intelligent Mail barcode mailers

• Information for USPS Reports – provides the information necessary to complete USPS-required documents for mail acceptance.

• Report Selection – allows you to print selected reports for each job (some reports are required by the USPS).

Accessing the Job Components

You can access all of the system components through the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen.


Parameters

Figure 1: Define and/or Submit a Presort Job Screen

Parameters

Job parameters and processing requirements are established through parameters. Parameters contain the “switches” and commands that allow you to:

• Define the presort

• Extract statistics

• Perform mailing sequence sort

• Update name/address records

• Format and print reports

On the IBM® i platform, the CHUI interface allows you to define job processing requirements by generating parameters “behind the scenes.” Each time you press F6 to save a screen definition, MailStream Plus builds the appropriate parameter lines, storing them in the correct parameter files.

Certain parameters are required, while others are optional, depending on the nature of your mailing. See chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide (for all platforms) for a detailed reference of all parameters, including whether each is optional or required.

14:25:26 MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPDS00 UPCPDS01 Job @IVP@ Define and/or Submit a Presort Job

Type options, press Enter. 2=Edit 6=Create *-------- Last Activity ---------* Opt Function Date Time User

PX Defaults for Print Output 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D PA Mailing Piece Attributes 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D ST Name/Address File Layout 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D PD Presort Definition 03/31/YYYY 17:23:53 PLAT00D NA Name/Address Record Posting 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D M3 MAIL360 03/31/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D RI Information for USPS Reports 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D RR Report Selection 03/31/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D

SB Submit Batch Job 03/31/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D

F3=Exit F12=PrevScrn F20=View Parm File F23=Card Edit


Chapter 2: MailStream Plus Jobs - What You Should KnowParameter Files

Parameter Files

The following table shows the parameter file names, their contents, and their corresponding screen labels.

MailStream Plus File Members and Their Corresponding Job Steps

This screen option... Allows you to...

And corresponds to this selection on the Define and/or Submit a

Presort Job screen (UPCPDS01)... Member

PX Define headers and footers for all reports

Defaults for Print Output @@PXT

PA Define attributes of the mailpieces, such as size and weight

Mailing Piece Attributes @@PAT

ST Define input locations for any possible field, such as ZIP Code, batch code, and Carrier Route Code

Name/Address File Layout STPRM

PD Define class and type of mail to process; identify additional information required for the presort (entry point code and ZIP Code, and so on)

Presort Definition @@PDF

NA Define fields posted to your output file; identify additional information to post to your output file

Name/Address Record Posting NAPRM

M3 Generate Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers or use MAIL360™

MAIL360 M3PRM

RI Define appearance for all reports Information for USPS Reports RPINF

RR Work with Reports Report Selection RPREQ

Perform global parameter editing functions

Press F23 from the Define/Submit Presort Job screen (UPCPDS01)

@@GLB


MailStream Plus Reports


More information about the MailStream Plus reports appears in Chapter 8 of this publication.

The following table relates the different optional reports to the types of mailings for which you might define them. Although each of these parameters is optional, the reports that they generate may be required for the USPS to accept your mail

Optional Reports

In addition to the two required reports that MailStream Plus compiles and prints for all jobs, there are also several optional reports you may select. The following table relates the different optional reports to the types of mailings for which you might define them. We provide the report name, the parameter for defining the report, list the entities that would use the report, and provide brief report descriptions. Although each of these parameters is optional, the reports that they generate may be required for the USPS to accept your mail.

Selecting Optional Reports (Part 1 of 3)

This report... Is defined by... Is used by... And serves this purpose...

Mail Content Audit Report

REPORT AUDITTRL

Mail shops Frequently used to print details at various levels: pallet, bag/sack, bundle. If needed, you can print a new page for each pallet in your mailing. Used for all classes.

Bag Tags REPORT BAGTAGS

Mail shops, USPS (when used with a utility to generate barcoded bag tags)

Generates unbarcoded tags for non-automation compatible mailings; also generates the input to the Bag Tag/Tray Tag Option, which generates barcoded, automation-compatible tags that the USPS requires for automation-compatible sacked mail. Used for all classes of mail.

NOTE: Although REPORT BAGTAGS is a valid parameter, we recommend that you use the REPORT CONTTAGS parameter instead of REPORT BAGTAGS.

Container Tags REPORT CONTTAGS

Mail shops, USPS Generates the barcoded tray/sack information file(s) that can be used to produce the barcoded tray or sack labels. Used for all classes of mail.

Carrier Walk-Sequence Report

REPORT CRRTWALK

USPS Generates the USPS-required Carrier Route Walk Sequence Justification Report for Periodicals and USPS Marketing Mail Walk-Sequenced mailings.


Chapter 2: MailStream Plus Jobs - What You Should KnowMailStream Plus Reports

Detail Report REPORT DETAIL Mail shops, USPS, Anyone requiring a paper trail

Frequently used to print details at various levels: entry point, batch, pallet, bag/sack, and bundle detail. If needed, you can print a new page for each pallet in your mailing. Used for all classes of mail.

Facing Slips REPORT FACESLIP

Mail shops, USPS Generates the facing slips used on bundles of mail.

MAIL.DAT File Build and Report

REPORT MAILDAT Mail shops, USPS, Anyone requiring a paper trail

Generates the Mail.dat files and produces a one-page summary report. Details items entering the USPS. Used for all classes of mail.

Manifest Report REPORT MANIFEST

USPS Produces a manifest report for your mailing. (Additional license required.)

Pallet Summary REPORT PALSUMM

USPS Palletized mailings only. Produces a summary of the palletized portion of your mailing, broken down by pallet, bag, or Piece-ID. (Additional license required.)

Pallet Tags Report REPORT PALTAGS Mail shops, USPS Palletized mailings, only: generates two copies of the actual USPS-required pallet tags. (Additional license required.)

Presort Verification Report

REPORT PRESVFY

Mail shops, former Mailer’s Choice users

Lists container destination information for each container, showing the tray, sack, or pallet label for that container. This report is especially helpful to mailers who use pre-ordered tray tags from the USPS rather than printing their own custom tags.

Statistical Report REPORT RUNSTATS

Mail shops, Anyone requiring a paper trail

Contains information broken down by entry point, batch code, piece ID, list code and/or key code.

Postage Statements Summary

REPORT SUMMARY

Mail shops, Anyone requiring a paper trail

Generates a summary of information on the USPS Statement of Mailing. Used for all classes of mail.

Tray Tags REPORT TRAYTAGS

Mail shops, USPS (when used with a utility to generate barcoded tray tags)

Generates non-barcoded tags for non-automation compatible mailings. Also generates the input to the Bag Tag/Tray Tag Option, which generates barcoded, automation-compatible tags according to USPS standards for automation-compatible trayed mail. Used for all classes of mail.

NOTE: Although REPORT TRAYTAGS is a valid parameter, we recommend using the REPORT CONTTAGS parameter.





The Bag Tags and Tray Tags reports can generate only non-barcoded tags through MailStream Plus. You must use a USPS-approved bag/tray tag generator, such as the Bag Tag/Tray Tag Option (BTO), to print barcoded, automation-compatible tags.

The Bag Tag and Tray Tag reports can generate only non-barcoded tags through MailStream Plus. You must use a USPS-approved bag/tray tag generator, such as Tag Print System 2009.

Periodicals Bundle Report

REPORT USPSBNDL

Periodicals Mailers and the USPS

Prints a report that provides an accounting of all bundles in a mailing and shows the USPS charges for Outside County processing. Valid for Periodicals Mail, only.

Periodicals Container Report

REPORT USPSCONT

Periodicals Mailers and the USPS

Prints a report that provides an accounting of all containers (sacks, trays, and pallets) and provides information to the USPS to show charges for Outside County processing.

USPS Qualification REPORT USPSQUAL

USPS Generates the USPS Standardized Documentation for your sortation

USPS Postage Statements

REPORT USPSSTMT

USPS For all classes of mail: generates the postage statements for your mailing: USPS forms 3600, 3541, 3602, and 3605.

Zone Summary REPORT ZONESUMM

USPS For Periodicals and Package Services mailings: Generates a summary of your mailing, organized by USPS zone (3-digit ZIP Code).

ZIP-Sequence Detail Report

REPORT ZSDETAIL

Anyone requiring a paper trail

Generates a summary of your mailing, organized by 5-digit ZIP Code sequence. Used for all classes of mail.




3
Getting Started with MailStream Plus
For New MailStream Plus Users: Setting Up Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Creating Your First MailStream Plus Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 The MailStream Plus Parameter Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Files Created for MailStream Plus Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

For New MailStream Plus Users: Setting Up Jobs


This chapter guides you through the MailStream Plus CHUI environment, as you take a closer look at the installation verification procedure (IVP) job that was copied to your system during the installation process.

Creating Your First MailStream Plus Job

1. If you performed the standard MailStream Plus installation, the default product libraries are G1@@PGMS (containing global/job management utilities) and G1MSPGMS (MailStream Plus application files). The first time that you sign on, you see the following menu:

2. Enter 1 in the Option field to display the Work with Jobs screen.

To install a database, use MailStream Plus menu F20 to enter database functions and select option 3.

Application Selection G1MM01 G1MM0001 Select one of the following:

1. MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System 2. List Conversion System 3. Label Printing System 4. Merge/Purge System 5. CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System 6. Generalized Selection System 7. EZ-CASE Plus 8. Geographic Coding Plus 9. I/O-Jet Plus 10. Business Merge/Purge Plus

60. Canadian/International Products

Option 1

F3=Exit F10=Command entry


Chapter 3: Getting Started with MailStream PlusFor New MailStream Plus Users: Setting Up Jobs

3. Press F6 to start the Create New Job function.

When you create a new job, you must also choose a work library. A new job ID prompt replaces the option list at the top of the screen. This is where you enter the new job ID: MYJOB.

4. In the Job ID prompt field, type the 1- to 5-character unique name for this job, and then press ENTER to display the Create New Job screen.

In addition to the alphabetic (A-Z) and numeric (0-9) characters, a Job ID can contain the following characters: #, $, @, and _.

5. In the Library for Job Objects field, type the name of the library in which to store the objects. This is the library in which to store all of the information defined for this job.

6. In the Input N/A file field, type the name of your input name/address file (the file does not have to be an existing one). Our example shows INFILE.

7. TAB to the next field.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPMM00 M UPCPMM03 Work with Jobs B Type options, press Enter. 3=Copy 4=Delete 7=Rename 12=Work with 16=Submit 99=Release job lock Position to job

Creation *------------ Last Activity ------------* Work Opt JobID Date Date User Function Library BELIN 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY D1DCOUR Upd: Print Dflts EDUCATION BRAD 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY D1RHARR Upd: Print Dflts EDUCATION CLWJD 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY QSECOFR Submit Job 0002 EDUCATION DRE1 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY D1DCOUR Submit Job 0003 EDUCATION ELLA 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU08 Submit Job 0003 EDUCATION JDMXX 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY D1RHARR Upd: Report Reqs UPTEST KATHY 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU09 Submit Job 0001 EDUCATION KURT 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU01 Submit Job 0010 EDUCATION LYNNE 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU09 Submit Job 0002 EDUCATION MIKE 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU06 Submit Job 0001 EDUCATION MYJOB 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY PBBIUSER Upd: Job Definition MYLIBR NANCY 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU07 Submit Job 0001 EDUCATION OMRL 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU01 Upd: Report Info EDUCATION

F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Create F11=Display Descriptions F12=Cancel F19=Reclaim space F21=Print Summary F24=More keys

Create New Job (UPCNJ01) Function Keys

Function Key Name Description

F3 Exit Create New Job screen and return to the Work with Jobs screen (UPCPMM03) without creating the new job.

F6 Create Job Create the job using the details provided on the screen.



8. In the Library field under “Input N/A file,” type the name of the library where your input name/address file resides, then TAB to the next field.

9. In the Member field, type the member of the “Input N/A file” containing your input name/address records, then TAB to the next field.

Job Management fills this field with *FIRST when it initially displays the Create New Job screen. This is a variable indicating that MailStream Plus processes the first member in the file.

10. In the Output N/A File field, type the name of your output file (this can be a new file); then TAB to the next field.

At the completion of MailStream Plus job processing, the file length of the NAMESjobid output file is 100 bytes longer. While you can edit the file length, keep in mind this additional 100 bytes is attached to any modification you make. Any post-processing or programs using the NAMESjobid file must be edited to account for the new size of this file.

Example: If your input file is 200 bytes, then the minimum file length of your output file is 300 bytes.

11. In the Library field under “Output N/A file,” type the name of the library containing the output name/address file, then TAB to the next field.

Job Management fills this field with *LIBWRK when the Create New Job screen is first displayed. This is a default library name.

12. In the Member field, type the member name containing your output name/address records, then TAB to the next field.

13. In the Job description field, type the name of the system- or user-defined job description, then TAB to the next field. The job description tells the operating system how to process this job.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPNJ00 UPCPNJ01 Job MYJOB Create new Job Specify library to hold job objects:

Library for Job objects . . . . . . MYLIBR

Provide job details as required:

Input N/A file. . . . . . . . . . . INFILE Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . INLIBR Member. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *FIRST

Output N/A file . . . . . . . . . . NAMESMYJOB Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . *LIBWK Member. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NAFWD

Job description . . . . . . . . . . QBATCH Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . QGPL F3=Exit F6=Create Job



14. In the Library field under “Job Description,” type the name of the library containing the specified job description.

Note that when the Create New Job is first displayed, this field is automatically filled in with the library that holds the default job description that is defined in the user profile. If you are using the default job description, do not change this field. If you have entered a different job description, make sure you have entered the correct library for that job description.

15. After you have filled in all of the fields, press F6 to create the job with the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen.

You can choose one of the options from the menu, and start defining the specifications for your job.

16. If you don't want to define your specifications, press F3. You again see the Work with Jobs screen, with your new job listed alphabetically among the other jobs.

The MailStream Plus Parameter Members

Now that you have created a new job, you can start defining the job details. You may access the job components from the Define/Submit MailStream Plus Job screen. For each of the components that you define, MailStream Plus stores parameter definitions to the following members.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPMM00 M UPCPMM03 Work with Jobs B Type options, press Enter. 3=Copy 4=Delete 7=Rename 12=Work with 16=Submit 99=Release job lock Position to job

Creation *------------ Last Activity ------------* Work Opt JobID Date Date User Function Library BELIN 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY D1DCOUR Upd: Print Dflts EDUCATION BRAD 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY D1RHARR Upd: Print Dflts EDUCATION CLWJD 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY QSECOFR Submit Job 0002 EDUCATION DRE1 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY D1DCOUR Submit Job 0003 EDUCATION ELLA 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU08 Submit Job 0003 EDUCATION JDMXX 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY D1RHARR Upd: Report Reqs UPTEST KATHY 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU09 Submit Job 0001 EDUCATION KURT 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU01 Submit Job 0010 EDUCATION LYNNE 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU09 Submit Job 0002 EDUCATION MIKE 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU06 Submit Job 0001 EDUCATION MYJOB 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY PBBIUSER Upd: Job Definition MYLIBR NANCY 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU07 Submit Job 0001 EDUCATION OMRL 02/24/YYYY 02/24/YYYY E1STU01 Upd: Report Info EDUCATION

F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Create F11=Display Descriptions F12=Cancel F19=Reclaim space F21=Print Summary F24=More keys

MailStream Plus IBM® i Parameter Members (Part 1 of 2)

Member Contents

All Job Parameters Members

ICP Member for all job parameters; created for each job run, and includes the job ID (ICPnnnn)



ZSMRD Member for ZIP Code sequence sort; created for each job and includes the job ID (ZSMRDnnnn)

RTP Member for RTYPES processing; created at job time if RTYPES is present and includes the job ID (RTPnnnn)

Individual Parameter Members

@@GLB Global parameters

@@PAT Piece attributes parameters

@@PXT Header and user-defined headers/footers

@@PDF Presort definition parameters

STPRM Define input locations for ZIP CODE, Batch Code, and other codes

RPREQ Report request parameters

M3PRM Control the creation of the Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers or to use MAIL360™

RPINF Report information parameters

NAPRM Define fields posted to your output file

MailStream Plus IBM® i Parameter Members (Part 2 of 2)

Member Contents



Files Created for MailStream Plus Jobs

MailStream Plus creates several job files (IBM® i Data Files) in the work library each time you run a job. Replace xxxxx with your job name.

IBM® i Data Files

File Name Description

CMDMSxxxxx Command file

DTAILxxxxx Detail statistics file

MLLABxxxxx Palletization label file

MSBARxxxxx Barcoded bagtag file (fixed length)

MSCTLxxxxx Control file

MSCOMxxxxx Communications file

Variable length: MVSSFxxxxx

Fixed length: MFSSFxxxxx

IFS: \GROUP1\MS\jobid\SSF.CSV

Shipping Services File - Support for confirmation services for IM® Package barcodes

MSNRCxxxxx Name record control file

MSMCBxxxxx Mailer’s Choice Barcoded tag file

MSIJ4xxxxx Mailer’s Choice 400-byte inkjet file

MSIJ6xxxxx Mailer’s Choice 600-byte inkjet file

MSTRAxxxxx Barcoded traytag file (fixed length)

MVBARxxxxx Barcoded bagtag file (variable length)

MVTRAxxxxx Barcoded traytag file (variable length)

NAMESxxxxx Output address file



MailStream Plus creates the following files for jobs using Mail.dat reporting:

IBM® i Mail.dat Files

Mail.dat - Fixed Mail.dat - Variable Description

MDCCRxxxxx MDCCRxxxxx Component characteristic record file

MDCPTxxxxx MVCPTxxxxx Component file

MDCQTxxxxx MVCQTxxxxx Container quantity file

MDCSMxxxxx MVCSMxxxxx Container summary file

MDEPDxxxxx MVEPDxxxxx Extra piece detail file

MDHDRxxxxx MVHDRxxxxx Header suffix file

MDICRxxxxx MVICRxxxxx Inkjet container file

MDMCRxxxxx MVMCRxxxxx Mailpiece component relationship file

MDMPAxxxxx MVMPAxxxxx Mailer postage account record file

MDPBCxxxxx MDPBCxxxxx Piece barcode record file

MDMPUxxxxx MVMPUxxxxx Mailpiece unit file

MDPDRxxxxx MVPDRxxxxx Piece detail Record file

MDPQTxxxxx MVPQTxxxxx Package quantity file

MDSEGxxxxx MVSEGxxxxx Segment file

MDSFBxxxxx MVSFBxxxxx Special fees barcode file

MDSFRxxxxx MVSFRxxxxx Special fees/charges record file

MDSNRxxxxx MVSNRxxxxx Seed name record file

MDWSRxxxxx MVWSRxxxxx Walk-sequence file

MDUPAxxxxx MVUPAxxxxx Uncoded parcels address record file


4
Defining Defaults for Print Output and Mailing Piece Attributes
Defining the Defaults for Print Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Defining Optional Report Information: Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . .32 Define the Optional Report Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Types of Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Defining Mailing Piece Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Defining Mailing Piece Attributes: Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Defining the Defaults for Print Output


Use the screens in the Defaults for Print Output component to define optional report information. When you define optional report information, you tell MailStream Plus:

• The date to print at the top of the first page of every report.

• The description appearing as a heading on the top of every page of every report.

• The ZIP Codes to process. If you wish, you may limit your mailing to range of ZIP Codes, starting with the lowest and ending with the highest. If you want to mail to every address in your input file, leave blank the Start and Stop ZIP Codes fields.

Defining Optional Report Information: Step-by-Step

Use the Defaults for Print Output component to define your optional report information.

Define the Optional Report Information

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, type a 2 in front of Defaults for Print Output.

2. Press Enter to display the Defaults for Print Output screen (UP6CPPX01).

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPX00 UPCPPX01 Job MYJOB Defaults for Print Output

[HEADER] Specify appearance for all reports: Header . . OPEN SYSTEMS MSN Header Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . *CURRENT MM/DD/YYYY Rate Choice. . . . . . . . . . . . . P, blank

To modify page headers and footers (UHDxx and UFTxx cards), press F11.

[PAGESZ] Specify report page size, translation, and duplex options: Reports Page Size (PRNTRPT). . . . . . . . . . . 25-999 (Dft: 60) Execution Log Page Size (PRNTXLG). . . . . . . . 25-999 (Dft: 60)

Translate Lowercase to Uppercase?. . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft: N)

Print Reports for Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, B, E, P, R (Dft: N) Statement Page Size (MSRPSTM). . . . . . . . . . 25-999 (Dft: 999)

F3=Exit F6=Update F11=Headers/Footers


Chapter 4: Defining Defaults for Print Output and Mailing Piece AttributesDefining the Defaults for Print Output

The Defaults for Print Output screen has the following function keys:

3. Define the Heading for all reports. You may enter up to 40 text characters to appear at the top of your MailStream Plus reports.

4. Define the Date for all reports. You have two choices here: If you want a specific date to appear on your report, enter that date in the form MM/DD/YYYY. If you want to use the current date, leave this field blank, and MailStream Plus uses *CURRENT to indicate the system date.

5. Use Rate Choice to define whether to use the current or previous set of postage rates. If you leave this field blank, MailStream Plus uses the current rates. Specify P to use the previous rates.

6. Override the number of lines to print for the reports, if you wish.

• For the Reports (file PRNTRPT), specify 2 or 3 numeric digits. The minimum is 25, the maximum is 999, and the default is 60.

• For the Execution Log (file PRNTXLG), specify 2 or 3 numeric digits. The minimum is 25, the maximum is 999, and the default is 60.

7. Indicate whether to print reports in UPPER CASE or lower case type. Enter a Y in the Translate Lowercase to Uppercase field to convert to all upper case type. You may leave this field blank to print mixed-case reports.

8. Specify Print Reports for Duplex for two-sided printing options. This field only applies to RPT requested reports and postage statements.

• E - Break when Entry Point changes.

• B - Break when Batch Code changes.

• P - Break when Presort Group changes.

• R - Break when New Report begins.

• N - Default. Process reports serially (no duplex).

9. To override the Postage Statement Page Size, specify 2 or 3 numeric digits. The minimum is 25 and the maximum/default is 999.

Function Keys on the Defaults for Print Output Screen (UPCPPX01)

Function Key Function Name Description

F3 Exit Exit from the Defaults for Print Output component, without saving the data.

F6 Update Save the data and quit from the Defaults for Print Output component.

F11 Headers/Footers Go to the Defaults for Print Output — Define headers and footers screen (UPCPPX03)



10. Press F11 to display the Define headers and footers screen, shown below.

The Define Headers and Footers screen has the following function keys:

The numbers across the top and bottom of the screen indicate the number of characters in each line. The screen can display 79 characters per line at one time. You may define four header and/or footer lines of 132 characters each. The headers and footers you define here appears on your MailStream Plus reports, in addition to the Heading for all Reports that was defined previously. Once you have created the headers and footers, the screen displays the message, Headers/Footers have been defined.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPX00 UPCPPX03 Job MYJOB Defaults for Print Output Specify lines to surround all reports: [UHDxx] Header Lines: 1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50...55...60...65...70...75.... [UFTxx] Footer Lines:

1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50...55...60...65...70...75.... Bottom F12=PrevScrn F13=Remove all F20=Scroll right

Function Keys on the Define Headers and Footers Screen (UPCPPX03)


F12 PrevScrn Save the additional headers and footers and go to the Defaults for Print Output screen (UPCPPX01).

F13 Remove All Remove all of the data in the Header Lines and Footer Lines fields.

F19 Scroll Left - This function key is only valid when positions 54-132 are displayed.

Scroll to the left on the screen to display positions 1-79 of the header and footer lines.

F20 Scroll Right - This function key is only valid when positions 1-79 are displayed.

Scroll to the right on the screen to display positions 54-132 of the header and footer lines.


Chapter 4: Defining Defaults for Print Output and Mailing Piece AttributesDefining Mailing Piece Attributes

Types of Headers and Footers

The Defaults for Print Output component allows you to define five types of headers and footers:

• System header - Always consists of a blank line, followed by a program number, the words “MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System”, and the name of the report. You cannot change the text of this header, nor can you suppress it.

• Main header - Defined in the Heading for all Reports field on the first Defaults for Print Output screen, prints under the system header.

• Additional header - Defined on the Define Headers and Footers screen, may be up to four lines long, and prints as the very top lines, above the system header line.

• System footer - Identical to the system header, except that it prints at the bottom of the report page. Like the system header, you cannot change the text, nor can you suppress it.

• Additional footer - Created on the Define Headers and Footers screen, may be up to four lines long, and prints as the very last lines, on the blank line, under the system footer line.

The date prints on the far left side of the main header line.

Defining Mailing Piece Attributes

Use the Mailing Piece Attributes screen to define physical mailpiece characteristics, such as:

• Location of the piece ID code

• Length of the piece ID code

• The actual piece ID code

• Weight of 100 mailpieces

• Thickness of 100 mailpieces

• Length of one mailpiece

• Height of one mailpiece

• Volume of 100 mailpieces

• Percentage of advertising for a Periodicals mailing

• Rate type

• Non-standard size indicator

• Non-subscriber type

• Automation-compatible piece indicator

• Code indicating if this is the default piece ID

You may describe a maximum of 30,000 unique sets of piece characteristics. Each piece ID record describes one set of piece characteristics.

For example, let’s assume that you are mailing invoices in #10-sized envelopes. The thickness of the piece varies depending upon the number of pages inside: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. You could use the following piece IDs to distinguish between the different thicknesses: INVOICEP1, INVOICEP2, INVOICEP3, INVOICEP4, and INVOICEP5.



Defining Mailing Piece Attributes: Step-by-Step

Use the Mailing Piece Attributes component to define your mailpiece:

1. Enter a 2 or 6 in front of the PA Mailing Piece Attributes option field to display the Mailing Piece Attributes screen.

2. Specify the Weight per 100 [pieces] (In pounds). This field is required to calculate the weight of your total mailing.

3. Specify the Thickness per 100 [pieces] (In inches). This field is required to calculate the volume of your total mailing. Use the mailpieces that you weighed in the previous step to determine the weight of 100 pieces.

• Square-up the 100 mailpieces, and stack them on a table.

• Use a ruler to measure the thickness (height) of the stacked mailpieces.

• Specify the thickness of this stack of mailpieces, in inches, in the field.

4. Specify the Height of 1 [mailpiece] (In inches). This field is required. Use one of the mailpieces that you measured in the previous step.

• Use a ruler to measure the top-to-bottom height of the mailpiece.

• Specify the height, in inches, of this mailpiece, in the field.

5. Specify the Length of 1 [mailpiece] (In inches). This field is required. Use the mailpiece from the previous step.

• Use a ruler to measure the end-to-end length (width) of the mailpiece.

• Specify the length, in inches, of this mailpiece, in the Len of 1 position.

6. Specify the Volume per 100 [mailpieces] (In cubic inches). This field is optional. You have two choices here: (1) You may leave this field blank if you specified the length and height of one

19:21:23 MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPPA00 M UPCPPA11 Job MYJOB Mailing Piece Attributes B Rls

[P ATTR] Specify Piece-ID table details: Piece-ID Location. . . . . . 192 Length . . . . . . . . . . . 1 [TABLSZ] Piece-ID Table Size .

[P ATTR] Specify Piece-ID attributes: View 1 of 4. F11=More ---> +---------------------------------+ OR +-----------+ Piece ID Weight Thickness Height Length Volume or per 100 per 100 of 1 of 1 per 100 *BLANKS (In pounds) (In inches) (In inches) (In inches) (In Cubic Inches) P 6.000 10.50 00999

F3=Exit F6=Update F11=More P ATTR options F17=Top F18=Bottom F24=Field Search F13=PA INF CARDS



piece and the thickness of 100 pieces. (2) Or, using the dimensions you calculated in the previous steps, you may calculate the volume of 100 mailpieces and enter it in the field.

• Multiply the height of one piece, the length of one piece, and the thickness of 100 pieces to calculate the volume.

• Enter the volume of 100 pieces of mail, in cubic inches, in the Vol/100 field. This field accommodates 1-6 numeric or decimal characters.

7. Use F11 to scroll to the second view of this screen.

8. If you are preparing a Periodicals mailing, specify the Percentage of Advertising. The USPS requires that all Periodicals mailings include a figure indicating the percentage of the mailpiece containing paid advertising. See the DMM for information on calculating the percentage of advertising.

9. Enter the special postage rate type code in the Rate Type field. MailStream Plus requires this field to calculate the postage rate for this mailing.

10. Enter the Rate Type Footnote code.

Rate Type Codes

Code Valid Mail Class

C - Classroom Periodicals

D - Double Postcard First-Class

L - Library Package Services

N - Non-Profit • Periodicals

• USPS Marketing Mail

P - Postcard First-Class

R - Regular Not valid for First-Class Parcels (Retail for Priority Mail)

S - Science of Agriculture (Periodicals) – or – S - Media Mail (Package Services)

• Periodicals

• Package Services

U - Priority Commercial Base Priority Mail

V - Priority Commercial PLUS First-Class parcels

blank - Default U for First-Class Parcels; otherwise, the default is R

Rate Type Footnote Codes (Part 1 of 2)


B - Priority Balloon Rate Priority Mail

C - Catalog Rate USPS Marketing Mail flats

E - Priority Mail flat-rate envelope provided by the USPS Priority Mail



11. For First-Class Mail or USPS Marketing Mail parcels, indicate whether a parcel surcharge

(Parcel Surcharge Required Ind) is required.

12. Clarify the Non-Subscriber Type for Periodicals mail. If your mailing contains Non-subscribers, enter one of the following codes:

13. Use F11 to scroll to the next view of this screen.

G - Priority Mail flat rate box provided by the USPS Priority Mail

J - Priority Mail large flat rate box provided by the USPS Priority Mail

K- Priority Mail large Priority Mail, for APO/FPO deliveries

L -Priority Legal flat-rate envelope Priority Mail

N - Non-Catalog Rate USPS Marketing Mail flats (default)

O - Priority small flat-rate box Priority Mail

P - Priority flat-rate padded envelope Priority Mail Commercial Plus

R - Regular (default) Default for Priority Mail

U - Cubic Prices Priority Mail Commercial Plus

V - Cubic Soft Pack Priority Mail

X - Regional Rate Box A Priority Commercial Plus and Commercial Base

Y - Regional Rate Box B Priority Commercial Plus and Commercial Base

Definition Descriptions

Y The mailpiece is required to pay the surcharge.

N or blank The mailpiece is not required to pay the surcharge.

Non-Subscriber Types

Code Definition

R Non-subscribers are requestors: no service charge applies.

U or blank Non-Subscribers are either non-subscribers or Non-Requesters.

Rate Type Footnote Codes (Part 2 of 2)




14. Specify whether your mailing is automation-compatible. Automation compatible mail is 100% Delivery Point Coded. Specify one of the following codes in the Auto-Compatible/Machinable Piece Ind field:

If you have automation-compatible pieces in your mailing, ensure that you specify a Y in this position. Otherwise, MailStream Plus assumes the default, N, and your job does not perform automation-compatible processing.

15. For Periodicals Mail, define the mailing class of the Periodicals enclosure (Enclosure Class):

Automation Compatibility Codes

Code Definition

Y Indicates that pieces with this attribute are automation compatible, or are a Machinable Parcel (valid for USPS Marketing Mail and Package Services mail classes).

N Mail is not automation-compatible. This is the default definition.

F FSM1000 mailpiece; for Periodicals only. Valid values for Periodicals are:

• Letters: Y or N (default)

• Flats: Y (default) or F

• Irregular: N is the only option/default

S Non-machinable Periodicals flats, for Periodicals only.

X The piece is not automation compatible but the non-machinable surcharge does not apply.

Enclosure Class Codes

Code Definition

1 First-Class Mail

S or 3 USPS Marketing Mail/Package Services Parcel Select Lightweight

blank Default is S



16. Specify the use of ride-along pieces in a Periodicals mailing. Make one of the following choices in the Ride Along/Enclosure field:

Pieces that take a ride-along must have their respective dimensions (weight, volume, and thickness) WITHOUT specifying the ride-along. MailStream Plus adds the ride-along dimensions to each piece used.

17. Define the Enclosure Mail Type for non-ride-along enclosures:

18. Use F11 to scroll to the fourth/final view of this screen.

Ride-Along/Enclosure Codes

Code Definition

H Host Piece. Leave positions 67 and 69 blank. This is the default.

E Enclosure/attachment piece. Position 67 may contain “1”, “S”, or “3”. Position 69 may contain “L”, “F”, “C”, or “D”. This option is not available for USPS Marketing Mail.

R Ride-Along piece: leave positions 67 and 69 blank (Periodicals Mail only).

Z Enclosure/attachment piece or Incidental: First-Class Mail Attachments and Enclosures in USPS Marketing Mail

Enclosure Mail Type Codes

Code Definition

L Letter

F Flat

C Card

D Double postcard

R Repositionable note attachment

blank Defaults to the mail type specified on screen UPCPPD10



19. Define the Simplified Address Indicator: This code indicates whether the current piece attribute definition applies to simplified addresses:

Simplified Address letter mailpieces can only be sorted into a MANUAL level Carrier Route tray.

20. Specify the default set of piece attributes. No matter how many piece attributes you define, you may designate only one as the default. Enter a Y in the Piece Attributes Default Indicator in the appropriate field to indicate the default piece attributes.

MailStream Plus can process Walk-Sequence Carrier Route sorted records that are designated as Simplified Addresses. USPS rules state that if a carrier route letter’s mailpiece does not contain a barcode then it gets the flat-rate surcharge. The Simplified Address feature works around this rule. If you describe a P ATTR definition as a Simplified Address piece attribute, you can assign the appropriate P ATTR codes to your Simplified Address pieces and, assuming they get sorted as Walk-Sequence Carrier Route, they are not assigned the flat-rate surcharge.

21. Define the P ATTR parameter link to a PA INF parameter when the 1-byte code you specify matches the 1-byte code for the PA INF definition (screen UPCPPA14).

In most cases, this field should be left blank. This setting is used primarily for Periodicals mailings.

Enclosure Mail Type Codes

Code Definition

Y Yes, this piece attribute definition applies to the simplified address. Do not specify Y on an enclosure or ride along mailpiece.

N No, this piece attributes definition does not apply to the simplified address.

blank Default is N.



22. Press F13 to specify piece attribute information that is associated with a particular P ATTR parameter.

23. Enter the same P ATTR code for the linked P ATTR parameter in the PA INF Link field.

In most cases, this field should remain blank. This link can be used to tie the mailpiece to specific report information. It can be used in Periodicals mail to define the publication name, number, and volume number.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPPA00 M UPCPPA14 Job MYJOB Mailing Piece Attributes B [PA INF] Enter ID and Attributes for each Piece:

Link PA INF P ATTR PA INF PA INF Default Link Code Subkeyword Text information L F AAAAAAAAA PUBLNM SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F6=Update F17=Top F18=Bottom F12=Back



24. Enter the same code on the P ATTR parameter that is being linked to this PA INF parameter in the P ATTR Code field.

• You may use the F4 prompt feature to display a list of valid parameter subkeywords for the PA INF parameter.

• You may specify the subkeyword to define in the Position to field, and the MailStream Plus UI will place your cursor in front of that keyword. If you are unsure of the keyword name, you can type the first letter or beginning string of the keyword.

You can select only one subkeyword per line when using the F4 prompt.

25. Enter the appropriate subkeyword and subkeyword information in the PA INF Subkeyword field.

For information on all subkeywords, see the Chapter 2 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.

26. Press F6 to save your definitions and exit the Mailing Piece Attributes screen.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPPA00 .............................................. g desired M UPCPPA14 : PA INF Subkeyword Select : utes B Rls : Select subkeyword, press Enter: : : 1=Select : : : : Position to: PA INF: : ID Description Len : Text information : APB Advertising Percent Basis 7 : : FEDAGC Federal Agency Cost Code 5 : : IMBMLR USPS Mailer ID for IMb 6/9 : : MDFEID Mail Fee IDs 20 : : MDIAMO Mail Owner CRID 12 : : MDIAMP Mail Preparer CRID 12 : : MDICID Mail Incentive IDs 20 : : More... : : : :............................................:

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F6=Update F17=Top F18=Bottom F12=Back


5
Defining Name/Address File Layout
Defining Name/Address File Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Defining the Input File Layout: Step-by-Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Defining the Input File Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Defining Batch Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55



The Name/Address File Layout component permits you to define:

• Input field locations

• Input field lengths

• Input field formats

• Processing options for input records

If you are defining a Periodicals mailing, you may have to define the input file non-subscriber information. If your mailing is within the annual 10% non-subscriber percentage, you do not necessarily have any non-subscribers.

Defining the Input File Layout: Step-by-Step

The Name/Address File Layout screens allow you to define input file content and layout, and to define the processing options that MailStream Plus uses to process the input file.

These steps start from the Define and/or Submit MailStream Plus Job screen.

Defining the Input File Details

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, type a 2 in front of Name/Address File Layout.


Chapter 5: Defining Name/Address File LayoutDefining the Input File Layout: Step-by-Step

2. Press Enter to display the first Name/Address File Layout screen, UPCPST10.

3. Specify the input location of the 9-byte Sequencing Control Field. MailStream Plus uses this field to sort Name/Address records into final mailing sequence.

4. Define the input ZIP Code [starting] position and format (Fmt). You have the following format

choices:

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPST00 UPCPST10 Job MYJOB Name/Address File Layout Rls [CONTRL] Specify location of the sort sequencing control field: Sequencing Control Field. . . . . . . . . . . . 193 9 Bytes [ZIP IN] Specify field locations on the input record: ZIP Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fmt: C C, P, B, F, 9 ZIP+4 Add-on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Fmt: C C, P, B Extracted ZIP Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carrier Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Check All 5 Digits of ZIP Code? . . . . . . . . . Y, N DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Fmt: C C, P, B Walk Sequence or Line of Travel . . . . . . . . 178 Line of Travel Sort Code . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Carrier Route Disposition When Walk Seq/Line of Travel is Blank . . . . C C, P, I Out of Sequence Processing Code . . . . . . . . X 0, 2, 4, 8, X County Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Validate Carrier Route? . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N

________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F6=Update F24=Field Search

Format Codes - Input ZIP Codes

Format Code Description

C Character - ZIP Code is in character (human-readable) display format.

P Packed - ZIP Code is in packed form in a 3-byte field.

B Binary - ZIP Code is a 3-byte binary number: if the 5-digit ZIP Code is binary and stored in 4-byte fields, use the B format code, specifying only the location or second byte in positions 8-10 of the ZIP IN parameter.

F Floating - ZIP Code is the final element in a “floating field,” whose rightmost position is defined in positions 8-10 of the ZIP IN parameter.

9 4-byte Binary - ZIP Code is 9-digits represented as a 4-byte binary number.



5. Define the input ZIP + 4 Code [starting] position and format (Fmt). You have the following

format choices:

6. Define the starting position of the Extracted ZIP Code.

This field contains the location in the name/address record where a 5-digit ZIP Code is stored. When the input ZIP Code is floating or packed, MailStream Plus requires that you place the ZIP Code in a fixed location for later sorting. MailStream Plus will then locate, convert, and store the ZIP Code in the specified location.

7. Define the starting location of the input Carrier Route Code field.

8. Tab to the Check All 5-Digits of ZIP Code? field. Enter a “Y” or “N” in this field to have MailStream Plus verify all five digits of your input ZIP Codes.

The default, “N,” automatically verifies that each input ZIP Code has five numeric digits, and that the first three digits are valid. Specify “Y” to check the 5-digit ZIP Code.

9. Define starting position and format (FMT) of the input Delivery Point Code (DPC) (2-digits).

If you did not define a ZIP + 4 Code, you may not define a DPC position.

You have the following DPC format choices:

10. Tab to the Walk Sequence or Line of Travel field. Define the Starting position of this field.

11. Define the input Line of Travel Sort Code starting position.

Format Codes - Input ZIP + 4 Codes


C Character - ZIP + 4 Code is in character (human-readable) display format.

P Packed - ZIP + 4 Code is in packed form in a 3-byte field.

B Binary - ZIP + 4 Code is a 3-byte binary number: if the 5-digit ZIP Code is binary and stored in 4-byte fields, use the B format code, specifying only the location or second byte on screen UPCPST01.

blank No ZIP + 4 Codes are used.

Format Codes - Input Delivery Point Codes


C Character - DPC is in character (human-readable) display format.

P Packed - DPC is in packed form in a 3-byte field.

B Binary - DPC is a 3-byte binary number: if the 5-digit ZIP Code is binary and stored in 4-byte fields, use the B format code, specifying only the location or second byte on screen UPCPST01.



12. Define Carrier Route Disposition. This definition is valid only if Line of Travel or Walk Sequence information is defined for this job. Your choices are:

13. Tab to the Out of Sequence field. Please review your MailStream Plus Reference Guide for

current defaults. You have the following choices:

Options for Carrier Route Disposition When Walk Seq/Line of Travel is Blank


P Process records that have Carrier Route Codes and no Walk-Sequence/Line-of-Travel information; qualify pieces as Enhanced Carrier Route (ECR) if possible.

C Ignore the Carrier Route information on this record if the WS/LOT information is blank or is an unmatched address WS/LOT code containing all zeros.

I Ignore the Carrier Route information on this record if the WS/LOT information is blank.

blank Default is C.

Out of Sequence Code Options (Part 1 of 2)


0 Do no sequence checking to ensure that the file is in Walk- or Line-of-Travel sequencing.

2 Issue an informational message if the file is not sorted into Walk- or Line-of-Travel sequence before sending to the Statistics function for processing. Processing continues, but MailStream Plus suppressed additional out of sequence messages. This is the default if the Walk Sequence/Line of Travel Location field is blank.

4 Issue a warning message if the file is not sorted into Walk- or Line-of-Travel sequence before sending to the Statistics function for processing. Processing continues, but MailStream Plus suppressed additional out of sequence messages.



14. Define the input County Code Position. MailStream Plus uses the 3-character FIPS County Code (Periodicals only).

15. Specify whether to Validate Carrier Routes.

• Enter Y to validate Carrier Route codes.

• Enter N to skip Carrier Route validation. This is the default if left blank.

16. Page Down to define List Code and Key Code details.

8 Issue a fatal error message if the file is not sorted into Walk- or Line-of-Travel sequence before sending to the Statistics function for processing. Processing stops immediately.

X Enables processing when the input name/address file is not pre-ordered by Batch, Entry-Point, ZIP, Carrier, and Walk Sequence/Line-of-Travel, or if the job has more than one P ATTR parameter.

An X is required when doing a Line-of-Travel or Walk-Sequence mailing, *and* one or more of the following conditions is true:

• You have not sorted your list into LOT or WS order prior to running MailStream Plus.

• You have more than one piece ID in your job.

• You are performing Firm Bundling.

An X is also required when posting the LOT information into the Optional Endorsement Line with POSTLB 'OEL Selection' = O.

You do not need an X under the following conditions:

• You are not doing a LOT or WS mailing. Or if you are doing a LOT or WS mailing, you have sorted your input file into LOT or WS order prior to MailStream Plus, and there is only one piece ID in your mailing, and you are not performing Firm Bundling.

• You are not posting the LOT information into the Optional Endorsement Line with POSTLB 'OEL Selection' = O.

Out of Sequence Code Options (Part 2 of 2)




Defining List Codes and Key Codes

1. Define the input List Code position and Length to indicate the starting position and length of your input List Code field.

MailStream Plus uses list codes to produce your statistical reports. For example: To break down report information by state, use the starting position and length of the input state field as your list code position and length.

2. Define the List Code Table Size. The default is 200.

We suggest that you leave this definition blank, allowing MailStream Plus to handle memory management. You may override the internal table sizes with your own definition, especially if you are using more than 200 list codes.

3. Define the Key Code starting position and Length.

This field defines the location of the input key code used by the Mail.dat seed name file. If the key code is not specified, or if it is blank or low-value, MailStream Plus uses the list code instead.

4. Specify the Starting Sequence # (9 numeric digits). The default is 1.

5. Page down to define address quality indicators.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPST00 UPCPST20 Job MYJOB Name/Address File Layout Rls Specify field locations: [L CODE] List Code Position. . . . . Length: 1-9 [TABLSZ] List Code Table Size. . . .

[K CODE] Key Code. . . . . . . . . . Length: 1-20

[SERIAL] Starting Sequence # . . . .

More... ________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F6=Update F24=Field Search



Defining Address Quality Indicators

1. Page down to define your Address Quality indicators, as follows:

2. Page Down to define non-subscriber processing.

Define Non-Subscriber Processing

1. Define your non-subscriber record processing requirements:

Defining Address Quality Indicators

Field Name Description

LACSLink Corrected Indicator Define the input record location of the one-byte LACSLink correction indicator.

DPV Indicator Define the input record location of the one-byte Delivery Point Validation (DPV) indicator.

Vacant Address Indicator Define the input record location of the Vacant Address indicator.

DPVCMRA Define the input location of the 1-Byte DPV Commercial Mail Receiving Agent (CMRA) Flag, or DPVCMRA.

DPVFALSEPOSITIVE Define the input location of the 1-byte DPV False Positive Indicator flag (DPVFALSEPOSITIVE).

LACSLINKCODE Define the input location of the 2-Byte LACSLink processing code (LACSLINKCODE).

DPVFOOTNOTE Define the input location of the 40-byte DPV Footnote text area. DPV footnotes are strings of two-character standard Postal Service™ codes indicating the quality of the match to the DPV database.

NCOA Footnote Define the input location of the 2-Byte NCOA footnote.

NCOA ANK Return Code Define the input location of the 2-Byte NCOA Address Not Known (ANK) Return Code.

Defining Non-Subscriber Processing

Field Description

Non-Subscriber indicator location

Location of the input non-subscriber code in the name/address records to test.

The value of “ALL” marks all name/address records as non-subscribers. The rest of this parameter is then ignored.

Length Length of the input non-subscriber code.



2. Page Down to define the firm bundling options for Periodicals Mailings.

Defining Firm Bundling

This is an optional step. We suggest that you sort your input file prior to using MailStream Plus in ascending order by Batch Code, Entry Point, ZIP Code, Carrier Route, and all fields specified on the FRM BL (formerly FRM PK) parameter. If you are performing a Carrier Route Line-of-Travel or Carrier Route Walk Sequence in addition to Firm Bundling, you need to use an X in position 46 of the ZIP IN parameter.

Please note that if a CRRT location is on the ZIP IN parameter, then the CRRT information is used by MailStream Plus for Firm Bundle Sequence Checking. If the CRRT is invalid in a name/address input record, then MailStream Plus interprets it as blank, and this may result in a firm bundle sequence error.

Comparison Type Code to describe the comparison type:

*EQ Compare the input non-subscriber code to determine if it is equal to the Comparison Values you define.

*NE Compare the input non-subscriber code to determine if it is not equal to the Comparison Values you define.

NOTE: Comparisons are done in “pairs,” requiring you to define the comparison logic (*EQ or *NE) and an accompanying value. For example:

• *NE defined with SUBSCR determines that records without the comparison value “SUBSCR” are non-subscriber records.

• *EQ defined with COMP determines that records that contain “COMP” are non-subscriber records.

Comparison Values Codes to compare against the input value described in the Relationship field. Duplicate comparison values are not allowed. Remember these “rules” when defining comparison values:

• You may specify up to five values to use with the comparison relationship you defined in the previous step.

• To use blanks as a comparison value, you MUST enter *BLANK as the first comparison value, or an error occurs.

• If you specify multiple values, the *EQ relationship identifies the record as a non-subscriber when the non-subscriber flag equals any of the comparison values.

• If you specify multiple values, the *NE relationship means that the record is a non-subscriber only when the non-subscriber flag does not equal any of the values.

Defining Non-Subscriber Processing

Field Description



1. Specify the information that MailStream Plus uses to identify records going to the same location.

2. Page Down to display screen UPCPST60. Define batch code details.

Defining Firm Bundling Processing

Field Description

Minimum Qty for Firm Bundle

Value from 2-9 indicating the minimum number of copies to make up a firm bundle. This is the threshold amount necessary to do firm bundling.

Position and Length of Firm Bundling Comparand Field

Define the starting location and length of the comparison field on the input name/address record.

These comparands are the fields in your name/address file that MailStream Plus uses to identify records in the same firm. Remember these rules for defining firm comparands:

• You may specify up to eight values.

• The Batch Code (if any) and the ZIP Code are assumed to be part of the comparands, so you do not need to specify them.

• The sum of the length of the specified values cannot exceed 99.

Firm Bundle Sequence Errors

Code indicating how to handle firm bundle sequencing errors:

E Generate an error and stop the run.

W Generate a warning message each time an error occurs. Continue processing.

1 Generate a warning message on the first error. Continue processing. Issue no additional warnings.

blank Default is E.



Defining Batch Codes

Use the Batch Code Definitions screen to define the portion of the input records that comprise the batch code. The batch code can be up to nine characters, separated into as many as eight components. If you specify separate batch code components in multiple fields, the sum of the separate component lengths cannot exceed nine bytes.

1. Define the Batch Code Table Size. The default is the greater of 200 or the number of ENT PT parameters used. MailStream Plus allows you to process multiple separate mailings from a single input name and address file. In order to identify which records belong in a specific mailing, the system looks for a batch code in each record. This screen allows you to define the positions and lengths of the batch code components.

2. Specify the input record Position for that component.

3. Tab to the Length field.

4. Specify a number from 1-9 to indicate the length of this component field.

5. Tab to the next Length field.

6. If you are defining additional batch code components, Tab to the next Position field, and repeat the position/length definitions as needed.

7. Press F6 to save the definition and return to the Name/Address File Layout screen.

8. Press F6 to update.

9. Page Down to define sequence error handling options.



Defining Sequence Error Treatment

1. Use the Input File Sequence Check Information screen (UPCPST70) to perform sequence checking on your input name/address file, and to specify the action to take when a sequence error is found. You may define a sequence control field consisting of up to seven segments. Sequence checks occur after each read operation, before any MOVExx parameters, and after the EXITIN routine takes processing control (if defined).

Complete the screen fields as follows:

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPST00 UPCPST70 Job MYJOB Name/Address File Layout Rls Input File Sequence Check Information [SEQCHK] Specify Sequence Error Treatment: Sequence error treatment. . . . . . . . . . . . . E = End of file: bypass the offending record, act as end of input file B = Bypass: bypass the offending record continue sequence checking C = Continue: continue processing and sequence checking I = Ignore: continue processing, abandon further sequence checking Specify Sequence Field Segment information: Position Length Packed Sequence field 1. . . . . . . . . . . . P = Packed Sequence field 2. . . . . . . . . . . . or Blank Sequence field 3. . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence field 4. . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence field 5. . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence field 6. . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence field 7. . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence field 8. . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence field 9. . . . . . . . . . . .

Bottom ________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F6=Update F24=Field Search

Defining Sequencing Error Treatment

Field Description

Sequence Error Treatment

Define how MailStream Plus handles any errors encountered:

B Bypass offending record.

C Continue processing.

E Terminate processing.

I Ignore; continue processing; abandon sequence-checking.

Specify Sequence Field Segment Information

Define up to nine segments. For each segment, define the:

• Location of the field used to check the sequence of the input Name/Address file

• Length of each segment

• Whether the field is packed format


6
Defining the Presort
Defining the Presort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Defining the Mail Class, Mail Type, and Discounts . . . . . . . . . .46 Defining an Entry Point Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Paying the Postage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Using the Palletization Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Overriding the Presort Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Sequencing Entry Point Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Excluding Entry Point Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Automation-Compatible Presorting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Presort Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Specifying Entry Point Parameter Group Number. . . . . . . . . . . .75 Add-A-Name Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Specify NDC Entry Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Specify SCF Entry Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Specify ADC Entry Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 More Entry Point Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Assign 3-Digit ZIP Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81



The Presort Definition component allows you to specify the class and type of mail. In this component, you must define the following items:

• Class of mail (First-Class, Periodicals, USPS Marketing Mail, or Package Services)

• Type of mail (such as letters, flats, parcels)

• Date of mailing

• Entry point of mailing

• Type of container

• Method of postage payment

• DFWorks® processing

Depending on the class of mail that you select, the screen display changes based on the different discount levels for the select class of mail. The Presort Definition component allows you may define multiple entry points using screens UPCPPD81 through UPCPPD85.

The Presort Definition screens allow you to enter information about the class and type of mail, point of mailing (entry point), and any available discounts.

These steps start from the Define and/or Submit MailStream Plus Job screen.

Defining the Mail Class, Mail Type, and Discounts

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, type a 2 in front of Presort Definition.


Chapter 6: Defining the PresortDefining the Presort

2. Press Enter to display the initial Presort Definition screen, UPCPPD10.

The options on screen UPCPPD10 change according to the class of mail and mail category you define. Some classes of mail require you to define presort type, special presort details, and non-subscriber information. Our example shows a First-Class letter mailing.

This screen has the following function keys:

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPPD10 Job MYJOB Presort Definition

[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . . 1 1 2 3 4 P S Mail Category. . . . . . . . . . L F L P Presort Type . . . . . . . . . . T R Detached Address Labels. . . . . A B

[E CODE] Define entry point components: Total length: 6 Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt 1. 186 6 C 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. To define entry point definitions, press appropriate F-key: [TABLSZ] Entry Point Table Size .: [EP ROL] Entry Point Roll . . : F20 [DSRSEL] Presort Manager. . . . .: F12 [ADC PT] ADC drop shipping. . : F21 [ENTRYP] Entry Group Number . . .: F14 [BATCHP] Batch Group Number . : F22 [ENT PT] ZIP Code entry points. .: F17 D [EP EXC] Exclusion Entry Points F23 [NDC PT] Mail Center entry points: F18 [ENT SQ] Entry Point Sequence : F24 [SCF PT] Facility entry points. .: F19 D More... F3=Exit F6=Update F10=Additional parameters F11=Pallet MIN/MAX F13=Specify Qualifying Amounts F15=Add EP Cards

Function Keys on Screen UPCPPD10 (Part 1 of 2)


F3 Exit Exit from the Presort Definition component, without saving the data.

F6 Update Save the data and quit from the Presort Definition component.

F10 Additional parameters Go to the additional Presort Definition screens (UPCPPD20-50)

F11 Pallet MIN/MAX Go to Pallet MIN/MAX/FRC Selection (UPCPD107)

F12 Presort Manager Go to Presort Manager.

F13 Specify Qualifying Amounts Go to Qualifying Amounts (UPCPPQ11).

F14 Entry Group Number Go to Specify Entry Point Group Number (UPCPEN11).

F15 EP modifications Go to Select EP Criteria to Modify (UPCPPD17)

F17 ZIP Code Entry Points Go to ZIP Code Entry Point Definition (UPCPPD75)

F18 Mail Center Entry Points Go to Specify NDC Entry Points (UPCPPD61, UPCPPD63); not available for First-Class.



3. Select a Class of Mail, and specify one of the following Categories and Mail Types:

An irregular parcel is a mailpiece that is not a letter, a flat, or a machinable parcel. This classification includes rolls and tubes up to 26 inches long and anything otherwise too big or too oddly shaped to be sorted on automated equipment. If your mailpieces have a strange shape, or are particularly large or heavy, check with your postmaster to see if they are irregular parcels

4. You must also define one of the following mail types:

Consult the DMM for more detailed explanations of each presort type.

F19 Facility Entry Points Go to the Specify SCF entry point codes screen (UPCPPD65); not available for First or Second Class mail.

F20 Entry Point Roll Go to Entry Point Roll (UPCPPD91)

F21 ADC drop shipping Go to ADC Point Definition

F22 Batch Group Number Go to Batch Parameter Group information.

F23 Exclusion Entry Points Go to Exclude Entry Points (UPCPEP11).

F24 Entry Point Sequence Go to Entry Point Sequence (UPCPP101).

Function Keys on Screen UPCPPD10 (Part 2 of 2)


Mail Classes and Presort Types

Class of Mail Presort Type

First-Class/Priority Mail (1) • R - Regular Mail

• T - Priority Mail

Periodicals (2 or P) • N - Newspapers

• P - Ordinary paper

USPS Marketing Mail (3 or S) • Customized MarketMail™ (C)

• L - Parcel Select Lightweight™ (Parcel Select only)

• M - Marketing parcels (USPS Marketing Mail Parcels only)

• R - Regular

Package Services (4) • F - Flats

• I - Irregular Parcels

• M - Machinable Parcels



5. Define the Detached Address Label type/Detached Marketing Label option, if any:

• A - Detached address label (DAL)

• B - Detached marketing label (DML)

• blank - Default is no detached address label or detached marketing label

6. Specify the separate Entry Point Components for the current mailing. You may specify eight different fields making up the entry point code.

• Specify the length of the entry point code in the Total length field.

• In entry field 1., define the first entry point code elements: Position (Posn), Length (Len), and Format (Fmt). Define the other elements as necessary.

7. Press F17 to define entry points for this mailing using the ZIP Code Entry Point Definition screen.

For the current example, we are defining one entry point. If you wish to define multiple entry points, press F11 to display screen UPCPPD81, then press F10 to display screen UPCPPD85.

8. Define the 5-digit Entry Point ZIP Code. This is the ZIP Code of the USPS facility that accepts your mailing.

9. Provide an Entry Point Constant. This definition is up to 30 text characters to print on all container tags and report headings.

If you are mailing from more than one USPS office, you must provide a definition for each entry point.

10. Specify the discounts that apply to the current mailing.

a. Enter Y or N in the Eligible for Intra-DDU Discount field, indicating whether this mailing qualifies for the Destination Delivery Unit discount.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPPD75 Job MYJOB Presort Definition ZIP Code Entry Point Definition [ENT PT] Specify entry point details. Press F11 for Multiple entry points. Entry Point from Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, Blank (Dft=Blank) Entry Point Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entry Point ZIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20706 Entry Point Constant PITNEY BOWES - LANHAM MD Eligible for Intra-DDU Discount?. . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for Intra-SCF Discount?. . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for Intra-NDC Discount?. . . . . . . . . . N, Y, X (Dft=N) Eligible for In-County Discount?. . . . . . . . . . Y, N, X (Dft=Y) Make Small Origin 3Digit/Scheme Containers? . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y) ENT PT for ZIPs?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for ADC Discount for Entry Point?. . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Tier Entry Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 3, 4 (Dft=Blank) Default Entry Point?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Post Office Facility Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . (See doc) Make No-Min 5-Dig/Scheme Containers for DDU Entry USPS Marketing Mail Parcels? . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y)

F3=Exit F6=Update F11=Multiple EP F13=Delete All F12=Cancel



b. Enter Y or N in the Eligible for Intra-SCF Discount field, indicating whether this mailing qualifies for the Sectional Center Facility discount.

c. Enter Y or N in the Eligible for Intra-NDC Discount field, indicating whether this mailing qualifies for the Bulk Mail Center discount.

d. For Periodicals Mail only: Enter a Y or N in the Eligible for In-County Discount field, indicating whether this mailing qualifies for the special in-county rate.

e. Enter Y or N in the Make Origin 3 Digit/Scheme Containers field to indicate whether or not to make this type of container.

f. Enter Y or N in the ENT PT for ZIPs field, indicating whether this mailing uses the default ENT PT for the ZIP Codes that match the ZIP Code defined at the top of this screen.

g. Enter Y or N in the Eligible for ADC Discount for Entry Point field, indicating whether this mailing qualifies for ADC-level discounts.

11. Enter 1, 2, 3,or 4 in the Tier Entry Point field to indicate the presort tier for this mailing. You can learn more about pricing/presort tiers at the USPS RIBBS web site.

12. Use the Default Entry Point field to define whether to use the default entry point code definition for ZIP Codes that match the ZIP Code defined above.

13. Define the Post Office Facility Type.

Review your MaiStream Plus Reference Guide, ENT PT parameter layout, position 64, for current facility types and defaults.

Your choices are:

Type Code Definition

A ASF

B NDC (formerly BMC)

C Origin SCF

D DDU

E Origin DDU

H Transfer Hub

J Origin ADC

K Origin NDC

L Origin ASF

N Non-determined

O Origin entry point (also DMU)

Q Origin AMF



14. Enter a Y or N in the Make No-min 5-Dig/Scheme Containers for DDU Entry USPS Marketing Mail Parcels field. The default is “Y.”

Defining an Entry Point Code

While still on screen UPCPPD75:

1. Press F11 to display screen UPCPPD81.

R ADC

S SCF


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPPD00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPPD81 Job MYJOB Presort Definition B

EP Code ZIP Constant Discount Default 1. 38001 PITNEY BOWES SOFTWARE NNNYNN Y

F4=Prompt EP at cursor F6=Accept Entry Points F10=Add Entry Point(s) F12=Cancel F24=More keys



2. Press F10 to add an entry point code using screen UPCPPD85.

3. You must define an entry point code for each entry point ZIP Code in your mailing. You can:

a. Designate the previous entry point as the default: Enter a Y in the Default Entry Point field; or,

b. Define a new entry point code: Use the steps from “Defining the Mail Class, Mail Type, and Discounts,” changing the details as needed.

4. Press F6 to store your entry point code.

5. Using screen UPCPPD85, specify as many entry point codes as you need.


Location of EP Code within Batch. . . 1 Length of EP Code . . . . . . . . . . 9 Entry Point number. . . . . . . . . . 4 Define Entry Point, press, F6.

Entry Point Code. . . . . . ZIP Code. . . . . . . . . 00000 Constant. . . . . . . . . Eligible for Intra-DDU . . . . N Y N (default N) Eligible for Intra-SCF . . . . N Y N (default N) Eligible for Intra-NDC . . . . N Y N (default N) Eligible for In-County . . . . Y Y N (default Y) Eligible for Local Zone. . . . N Y N (default N) Is the Post Office of entry a NDC? . . . . . . . . . N Y N Default entry point. . . . . . Y N (default N) Make 3-digit/scheme containers Y Y N (default Y)

F5=Refresh F6=Accept F12=PrevScrn



6. When you are finished defining entry point codes, press F12 to return to screen UPCPPD81. MailStream Plus lists the defined entry point codes and indicates the default entry point for this mailing.

We provide a sample entry point code for this example:

7. Press F6 to accept the entry point codes for this mailing. MailStream Plus returns you to screen UPCPPD75.

8. Press F6 to save your definition.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPPD00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPPD81 Job MYJOB Presort Definition B

[ENT PT] Specify location and length of entry point code:

EP Code ZIP Constant Discount Default 1. 20706 PITNEY BOWES SOFTWARE NNNYYN Y

F4=Prompt EP at cursor F6=Accept Entry Points F10=Add Entry Point(s) F12=Cancel F24=More keys



Paying the Postage

1. From screen UPCPPD10, Page Down to display screen UPCPPD20.

2. Specify the Method for Postage Payment, using the appropriate code. Your choices are:

This field has no effect on Periodicals mailings.

3. Specify whether to apply the Intelligent Mail® Full Service (IMFS) discount to eligible pieces:

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPPD20 Job MYJOB Presort Definition Override default values for Presort, as required: [ALG PP] Method of Postage Payment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P, C, M (Dft=P) Intelligent Mail Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y, X Is this an eVS Mailing? (Affects IMpB mailings) . . . N, Y (Dft=N)

[ALG PL] Type of Palletization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, B, P (Dft=N)

Palletize . . .Automated Mail? . Machinable Mail?. Y, N (Dft=Y) Enh Carrier Mail? Non-Auto Mail?. .

Underweight Commingling Percentage . . . . . . . (Dft=100.0) Perform Reverse SCF Presort? . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=See Doc) Perform Reverse NDC Presort? . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=See Doc) Merged Allowable Percentage. . . . . . . . . . . (Dft=5.0) Mixed Containers on ASF/NDC Pallets? . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N)

More...

F3=Exit F6=Update

Postage Payment Options

Option Payment Method

P or blank Permit imprint

C Pre-cancelled stamp

M Meter stamp

Value Definition

Y or F Full Service - This is an IMFS mailing. Verify the Service Type ID (STID). If the STID for the Full Service eligible mail piece is the NON-AUTO/Basic STID, then change the STID to the corresponding Full Service STID. Also, assign the Intelligent Mail Full Service discount to the eligible mail pieces.

N, B, or blank Basic - This is not an IMFS mailing. Verify the STID. If the STID for the mail piece is a Full Service STID, change the STID to the corresponding NON-AUTO/Basic STID.

X Do not verify the STIDs - Use the STID assigned without altering the STID.



4. Define whether this is an Electronic Verification System (eVS®) Mailing. An eVS mailing applies

to IM® package Barcode mailings, only.

Using the Palletization Option

If you select and setup to do a palletization presort, but have not purchased and installed the Palletization Plus option, the job will produce an error message and stop.

Your pallet options are on screens UPCPPD20 and UPPCPPD25.

Option Definition

Y Yes, this is an eVS mailing.

NOTE: In this case, “eVS” will be included in the banner text of the IM®pB. If MailStream Plus is creating the IM® pB, the STID will be validated for eVS.

N or blank No, this is not an eVS mailing.

Palletization Options (Part 1 of 3)

Operation Option Purpose

Automated Mail? N No, do not palletize automated mail

Y or blank Yes, palletize automated mail

Machinable Mail? Y or blank Yes, palletize machinable mail

N No, do not palletize machinable mail

Enh[anced] Carrier Mail? Y or blank Yes, palletize enhanced carrier route mail

N No, do not palletize enhanced carrier route mail

Non-Auto[mated] Mail? Y or blank Yes, palletize non-automated mail

N No, do not palletize non-automated mail

Underweight [commingling] percentage

numeric value from 00000 to 99999

Numeric value indicating the percentage of pallets that may be underweight (under the FRC amount).

Default is 00000 (equal to 100%). There is no limit on underweight pallets.

Perform SCF Reverse Presort?

Y Yes, perform SCF Reverse presort.

N or blank No, do not perform SCF reverse presort.



Perform Reverse NDC Presort?

Y Yes, perform NDC Reverse presort.

N or blank No, do not perform NDC reverse presort.

Merged Allowable Percentage

numeric value from 00000 to 99999

Define the percentage of mail that is permitted to be merged, by ZIP Code, when merging bundles of flats on pallets using a 5% threshold, or merging bundles of flats on pallets using the city/state product and a 5% threshold.

Default is 00005.

Merged containers on ASF/NDC Pallets?

Y Yes, perform SCF Reverse presort.

N or blank No, do not perform SCF reverse presort.

NOTE: Palletization Plus reads the values in the XXX PT parameter to determine the entry point facility type. Also, the USPS Drop ship file is checked to see if the locale code is a joint facility, such as both an NDC and SCF location. Palletization Plus does this before allowing undersized pallets for this parameter.

Allow Undersized Entry SCF Pallets?

Y or blank Yes, allow undersized entry for SCF pallets.

N No, do not allow undersized entry for SCF pallets.

Allow Undersized Entry ADC Pallets?

Y or blank Yes, allow undersized entry for ADC pallets.

N No, do not allow undersized entry for ADC pallets.

Allow Undersized ASF/NDC Pallets?

Y or blank Yes, allow undersized entry for ASF or NDC pallets.

N No, do not allow undersized entry for ASF or NDC pallets.

Undersized Entry Pallet Minimum Weight

numeric value Enter the minimum weight for an undersized entry of SCF, ADC, ASF, or NDC pallets. The default is 100.0.

Put Mixed Containers on SCF Pallets?

NOTE: For First-Class, MailStream Plus places mixed containers on the origin SCF pallet only.

Y (default for First-Class Mail)

Yes, put mixed containers on SCF pallets.

N (default for all classes of mail except First-Class)

No, do not put mixed containers on SCF pallets.

Min Trays for Undersized Entry SCF/ADC/ASF/NDC Pallets

numeric value Enter the minimum number of trays for undersized entry or SCF, ADC, ASF, or NDC pallets. The default is 6.





Overriding the Presort Options

You may skip these definitions, using all of the default settings, or you may override specific defaults as follows.

1. From screen UPCPPD25, page down to display screen UPCPPD30.

2. Type Q or N in the Carrier Optimization Option field. Option Q handles the anomaly where the Basic Enhanced carrier rate is more expensive than some of the automation letter rates. Option Q moves mail to the Automation portion of the presort if the resulting presort level rate is less expensive than Basic CRRT under the current USPS rates.

3. Define the Carrier Walk Sequence of [the] Input File. Your choices are:

ADC/AADC Trays on First-Class & Std Mail SCF Pallets?

Y For First-Class, this option places both ADC and AADC trays on SCF Pallets. For USPS Marketing Mail, this option places AADC trays on SCF Pallets.

N or blank (Default) No, do not place ADC/AADC Trays on SCF Pallets.

CSA Pallet Sort?

NOTE: Valid for First-Class letter and flats mailings, only

Y Yes, perform a CSA Pallet Sort.

N or blank No, do a DMM Pallet Sort

Force MXADC/MXAADC Trays to CSA Working Pallets?

Y or blank Yes, force MXADC/MXAADC trays to CSA Working Pallets

N No, do not force MXADC/MXAADC trays to CSA Working Pallets. Allow them to be placed on other pallet levels



Option Purpose

W File is in carrier walk sequence.

L (Default for Periodicals Mail) File is in line-of-travel sequence.

N (Default for all classes of mail except Periodicals) File is in neither carrier walk sequence nor LOT sequence.

Z Input is in Carrier Walk Sequence. Attempt saturation based on true residential record count.



In applying this discount, MailStream Plus will attempt the Carrier Route qualification selected. Please consult your DMM for additional information about walk-sequence and Line-of-Travel presorting. If doing a Carrier Route mailing and the Name-Address input file is not already in a Line-of-Travel or walk sequence order, please see the ZIP IN “Out of Sequence Processing Code” field on the UPCPST10 screen shown in Chapter 4 in this document.

4. Specify whether to perform these specific qualifications:

– Non-Automation Enhanced Carrier Presort

– Regular Carrier Presort

– Auto-enhanced Carrier

– Barcoded Enhanced Carrier

– Machinable Enhanced Carrier

– Manual Enhanced Carrier

– Walk Sequence Saturation

5. Specify whether to create Multi-Carrier Route Bundles (Y or N).

6. Page Down to display screen UPCPPD32.

7. Type Y or N in the Make Small 3-Digit Containers field to specify whether you wish to use this Presort whenever possible. The default is Y.

8. Type Y or N in the Maximize Full Containers field to indicate whether MailStream Plus fits as many qualified pieces as possible into containers.

Sequencing Entry Point Codes

MailStream Plus allows you to sequence entry points so that you can time the delivery of mailpieces based on geography. See the description of the ENT SQ parameter in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide for additional information. Follow these steps to sequence your entry point codes:

1. Starting at screen UPCPPD10. Press F24.


[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 3 4 P S Mail Category. . . . . . . . . L F I L P Presort Type . . . . . . . . . C R M L Detached Address Labels. . . . A B

[E CODE] Define entry point components: Total length: 6 Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt 1. 191 6 C 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. To define entry point definitions, press appropriate F-key: [TABLSZ] Entry Point Table Size .: [EP ROL] Entry Point Roll . . : F20 [DSRSEL] Presort Manager. . . . .: F12 [ADC PT] ADC drop shipping. . : F21 [ENTRYP] Entry Group Number . . .: F14 [BATCHP] Batch Group Number . : F22 [ENT PT] ZIP Code entry points. .: F17 D [EP EXC] Exclusion Entry Points F23 [NDC PT] Mail Center entry points: F18 [ENT SQ] Entry Point Sequence : F24 [SCF PT] Facility entry points. .: F19 D More... F3=Exit F6=Update F10=Additional parameters F11=Pallet MIN/MAX F13=Specify Qualifying Amounts F15=Add EP Cards



MailStream Plus displays screen UPCPP101.

2. Press F10 to display screen UPCPP102 to define an Entry Point.

3. Enter an up-to-9-character Entry Point Code in the ENT SQ entry point code field.

4. Enter a 5-digit sequence/ordering number in the Entry Point Sequencing Number field.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPP101 Job MYJOB Presort Definition

[ENT SQ] Specify ENT SQ entry point codes: Entry Entry Sequence C=Chg Point Point Auto Build 3-Digit Center of Default D=Dlt Code Sequence Sequence Point only Entry Point

F6=Accept EPs F10=Add EPs F12=Cancel F13=Delete all F17=Top F18=Bottom F19=Sort by SCF F20=Sort by Constant

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPP102 Job MYJOB Presort Definition

[ENT SQ] Specify ENT SQ entry point definition: EP number: 1

ENT SQ entry point code. . . . . Entry point sequence number. . . Auto build sequence. . . . . . . (N W E I O) Default: N 3-digit center point only. . . . Sequence of default entry point. (F L S) Default: S

F3=Exit F6=Accept



5. Choose an option for the Auto Build Sequence field. The options are:

6. Enter a specified 3-digit entry point code in the 3-digit Center point only field. This indicates the three-digit, geographic center point of the sequence.

Auto Build Sequence Options

Option Purpose

E Build sequence number East to West

W Build sequence number West to East

I Radiate sequence number inward

O Radiate sequence number outward

N or blank Do not perform auto build



7. Choose an option for the Sequence of Default Entry Point field. This option specifies whether the default entry point is at the beginning or the end of the sequence:

8. To save your definitions and exit this screen, press F6.

Excluding Entry Point Codes

MailStream Plus allows you the option to exclude specific entry point codes from your job. The EP EXC parameter makes this exclusion possible.

1. Starting at screen UPCPPD10 press F23.

2. Enter the 4- to 6-character entry point code, where the first character is B, S, or A, indicating the type of entry point code: NDC, SCF, or ADC. The codes entered are system generated by the NDC PT, SCF PT and/or ADC PT options.

Default Entry Point Sequence Options

Option Purpose

F Default entry point is first

L Default entry point is last

S or blank Based on the option you entered in the Auto Build sequence field.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPEP00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPEP11 Job MYJOB Presort Definition B [EP EXC]

Specify Entry Point Exclude Parameters : Exclude Entry Points F3=Exit F6=Update F17=Top F18=Bottom F24=Field Search



Automation-Compatible Presorting Parameters

Screen UPCPPD35 shows the various options available for DMM automation-compatible mailings. Please consult your DMM for additional information about bundle-based, tray-based, barcoded, and automated site automation-compatible mailing.

1. Indicate whether to Attempt Automation Presort: Y or N.

2. Type Y or N to specify whether or not you wish to Attempt Machinable Qualification.

3. Type a number, from 1-99999, to override the Minimum Number of Pieces to Attempt an Automated Mailing. The default is 1. We recommend NOT overriding this field.

Saving Your Definitions

To save your presort definitions: Press F6 to update. Follow the prompts to save to an external file, or press F3 to save and return to the Define and/or Submit Presort Job screen.


Chapter 6: Defining the PresortPresort Options

Presort Options

MailStream Plus offers you several options to help further define your presort.

Specifying Entry Point Parameter Group Number

You can use the following screen to specify entry point parameter group information. For more information see the ENTRYP Parameter description in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPEN00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPEN11 Job MYJOB Presort Definition B

[ENTRYP] Specify Entry Point group number: Low High Location Group Entry Point Entry Point within Entry Point Length of Number Code Code to start comparison compare value

F3=Exit F6=Update F17=Top F18=Bottom F24=Field Search


Presort Options

Add-A-Name Function

You can use this screen to add name and address information to your job. For more information, see the description of the ADDNAM parameter in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.

When using the MailStream Plus Add-A-Name Function, which uses the ADDNAM parameter, note that the Bank file name is not saved between jobs. The bank file name is saved only after a new job is being created. If using an existing job, you must enter the bank file name on the Define/Submit screen.


[ADDNAM] Add Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B D X B = Add from bank of names D = Duplicating the last record in the group (default) X = Both, add Bank or duplicate the last record Max records to add per carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 1-10 (default blank) Total max records to add. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No max Verify Sort Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E W N E = Error and Stop run (Default) W = Issue a Warning N = Do not Check [DS MIN] Minimum Pieces per scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More... F3=Exit F6=Update



Specify NDC Entry Point Definition

You can use this screen to specify NDC entry point information. For more information, see the description of the NDC PT parameter in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.

Specify SCF Entry Point Definition

You can use this screen to add SCF entry point information. For more information, see the description of the SCF PT parameter in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPPD63 Job MYJOB Presort Definition [NDC PT] Specify NDC entry point definition: EP number: 1 NDC Entry Point Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZIP Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entry Point Constant Automatically Qualify all NDCs? . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Offshore ZIPs in this Entry Point. . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y) Include ASFs?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for DDU discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for SCF discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for NDC discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y, X=Special (Dft=N) Eligible for In-County discount? . . . . . . . . . Y, N, X=Special (Dft=Y) NDC PT for ZIPs? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) EP facility type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (See doc) Make 3Digit/Scheme or PER SCF Containers?. . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y) Default Entry Point? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for ADC discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Make No-Min 5-Dig/Scheme Containers for DDU Entry USPS Marketing Mailparcels? . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y)

F3=Exit F6=Accept

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPPD67 Job MYJOB Presort Definition [SCF PT] Specify SCF entry point definition: EP number: 1 SCF ID Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCF Entry Point ZIP Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCF Entry Point Constant . . Automatically Qualify All SCFs?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Include Offshore ZIPs in this Entry Point? . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y) Eligible for ADC Discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for DDU Discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for SCF Discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for NDC Discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y, X (Dft=N) Eligible for In-County Discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N, X (Dft=Y) Use Default SCF PT for ZIP Codes matching the SCF PT in Columns 22-26?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Entry Point Facility Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (See doc) Make Small Origin 3Digit/Scheme Containers?. . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y) Default Indicator? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Make No-Min 5Digit/Scheme Containers for DDU Entry USPS Marketing Mail parcels?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y)

F3=Exit F6=Accept


Presort Options

Specify ADC Entry Point Definition

You can use this screen to add ADC entry point information.For more information, see the description of the ADC PT parameter in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.


[ADC PT] Specify ACD entry point definition: EP number: 1 ADC Entry Point Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADC Entry Point ZIP Code . . . . . . . . . . . Entry Point Constant Automatically Qualify all ADCs?. . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) OffShore ZIPs in this Entry Point? . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y) Eligible for DDU Discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for SCF Discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for NDC Discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y, X=Special (Dft=N) Eligible for In-County Discount? . . . . . . . . . Y, N, X=Special (Dft=Y) Use default ADC PT for ZIP Codes matching the ADC PT in Columns 22-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=N) EP Facility Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (See doc) Make Small Origin 3Digit/Scheme Containers?. . . . Y, N (Dft=Y) Default Entry Point? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Eligible for ADC Discount? . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N) Make No-Min 5Digit/Scheme Containers for DDU entry USPS Marketing Mail Parcels? . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y)

F3=Exit F6=Accept



More Entry Point Options

There are several options that are tailored specifically to defining your entry points. Screen UPCPPD17 serves as the gateway to those options.


[EP MIN] Entry Point Minimum . . . F15

[EP MINC] Entry Point Minimum cont. F16

[EP TBL] Entry Point Table . . . . F17

F15=EP MIN F16=EP MINC F17=EP TBL F6=Save F12=Back


Presort Options

Specify Entry Point Minimums

You can use this screen to define minimum values for specific entry points. For more information, see the description of the EP MIN parameter in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide. You can use the screen below to define minimum values for specific entry points. For more information, see the description of the EP MINC parameter in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 Replace with screen heading desired UPCPPD69 Job MYJOB Presort Definition Rls

[EP MIN] Specify Entry Point Minimums: ADC/ ADC/ Move Build NDC NDC ASF ASF SCF SCF ENT All Min D Orig EP New EP Min Pc Min Wt Min Pc Min Wt Min Pc Min Wt PT Tier Calc

_______________________________________________________________________________ D=Delete F6=Accept EPs F10=Add F12=Cancel F13=Delete All F17=Top F18=Bottom F19=Sort by Original F20=Sort by Alternate



Assign 3-Digit ZIP Codes

You can use this screen to assign a 3-digit ZIP Code to entry points used in the EP MIN and EP ROL parameters. For more information, see the EP TBL parameter in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPPD87 Job MYJOB Presort Definition [EP TBL] Specify Entry Point Table: D Entry Point Code Low 3dg ZIP Range High 3dg ZIP Range D=Delete F6=Accept EPs F10=Add F12=Cancel F13=Delete all F17=Top F18=Bottom F19=Sort by Original F20=Sort by Alternate


Presort Options


7
Defining Name/Address Record Posting
Defining MailStream Plus Output Files - The Basics . . . . . . . . . .84 Posting Optional Output Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Defining Output Fields: Step-by-Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Saving Your Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Defining MailStream Plus Output Files - The Basics

Defining MailStream Plus Output Files - The Basics

There are specific tasks for defining output definitions:

• Selecting specific reports to print

• Output file definition

• Posting requirements definition

Whereas Chapter 8 shows how to define reports, this chapter discusses and describes the steps for posting optional fields to your MailStream Plus output records, in this chapter we show you how to define general report details.

The optional Name/Address Record Posting component allows you to specify:

• Details to retain and write (“post”) to individual output records

• The location and name of the file to which MailStream Plus writes valid records

Through the Name/Address Record Posting component, you define the fields to append to your name/address records once presorting is complete. MailStream Plus requires you to define the location for each output field.

This component/function is optional and is to be used only if you wish to post any or all of this additional information to your output name and address records. The posting information may be used for tracking, reporting and statistical purposes.


Chapter 7: Defining Name/Address Record PostingPosting Optional Output Fields

Posting Optional Output Fields

The Name/Address Record Posting component builds parameters for each optional output field you define. The following table lists and describes the more commonly used fields, and shows the parameter that MailStream Plus builds “behind the scenes” for your batch jobs.

Optional Output Record Fields (Part 1 of 3)

To Post This Information... Go to...

MailStream Plus Builds this

Parameter...

Automated rate indicator in Optional Endorsement Line

6-byte Automation Rate/Single Piece Indicator

Single Piece indicator

Automated rate indicated in OEL

Use Bag Tag contents line

Optional Endorsement Line

Post Mail Type Indicator to OEL

Barcoding discount indicator

Cubic pricing indicators for Priority Mail and First-Class Parcels

Tray Preparation Types

Screen UPCPNA11: Press F20 for more options. POSTLB

Pallet Destination Information

Pallet NDC sequencing number

Pallet SCF sequencing number

Protected Pallet Indicator

Screen UPCPNA11 POSTPL

More POSTxx Parameters (Press Page down on the initial UPCPNA11 screen)

Bag/Tray information: destination, NDC sequencing number, SCF sequencing number, container type

Screen UPCPNA11 POSTBG

Bundle [Package] information: destination, NDC sequencing number, SCF sequencing number

Screen UPCPNA11 POSTBL (formerly POSTPK)

Zone (character format) Screen UPCPNA11 POSTZN

Rate Code/Category Information: enhanced carrier sub discount, piece weight increment, piece total postage, DuoSort information, Sort Presort Group Indicator, Full service eligibility flag

Screen UPCPNA11 POSTRC


Posting Optional Output Fields

Presort group, mailing statement ID, indicators, sortation level discount indicator, carrier route discount indicator, ZIP + 4 indicator, Zone discount indicator, destination discount indicator

Screen UPCPNA11 POSTGN

General Information codes Screen UPCPNA11 POSTIB

Manifest rate code Screen UPCPNA11 POSTMR

Mail.dat single piece information Screen UPCPNA11 POSTMD

Manifest information: id, piece weight increment, rate, piece postage,

Screen UPCPNA11 POSTMK

Additional POSTxx Parameters (Press F15 on screen UPCPNA11)

Post Entry Point details: Original Entry Point Code, New Entry Point Code, Numeric Entry Point number

Screen UPCPNA13 POSTEI

Post Batch details: Batch Code, New Batch Code, Numeric Batch number

Screen UPCPNA13 POSTBI

Post Pallet details: Pallet number, Labeling List Code, Container Intelligent Mail® Barcode number

Screen UPCPNA13

NOTE: Applies to the Shipping Services File (SSF)

POSTLI

Post Container details: Container number, Labeling List Code, Container Intelligent Mail® Barcode number

Screen UPCPNA13

NOTE: Applies to the Shipping Services File (SSF)

POSTCI

Post Bundle number, Labeling List Code

Screen UPCPNA13 POSTPI

Post record information: Input Sequence number, Final Sort Sequence number

Screen UPCPNA13 POSTRI

First record in a firm bundle, 4-byte Firm ID code, Number of firm copies

Screen UPCPNA25 POSTFM

North/South sequence information: sequence number output location, number-up printing

Screen UPCPNA25 POSTNS




Parameter...


Chapter 7: Defining Name/Address Record PostingDefining Output Fields: Step-by-Step

Defining Output Fields: Step-by-Step

The Name/Address Record Posting screens allow you to define optional output fields to retain after MailStream Plus completes the presorting.

Defining Individual Fields

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, type a 2 in front of Name/Address Record Posting.

2. Press Enter to display Name/Address Record Posting screen, UPCPNA11. This screen has the following function keys:

Break Mark information: location for pallet, container, and bundle break marks; start of new pallet, container, or bundle; characters to identify pallet, container, or bundle

Screen UPCPNA18 POSTBK

Information to create inkjet file lines 1 through 6

Screens UPCPNA19, UPCPNA20, UPCPNA21, UPCPNA22, UPCPNA23, and UPCPNA24

LABLN




Parameter...


F3 Exit Exit from the Name/Address Record posting component, without saving the data.

F6 Update Save the data and quit from the Name/Address Record Posting component.

F15 Addl POST Page down to see additional posting fields.

F17 Top Page up to the top of the posting fields selections.

F18 Bottom Page down to the bottom of the posting fields selections.

F20 More POSTLB Options

Define additional automated rate posting items.

F24 Field Search Go to the Display Database File Field screen.


Defining Output Fields: Step-by-Step

3. Define the individual fields to post to the output records.

• For most fields, MailStream Plus provides the maximum length (Len).

• The Posn field indicates the starting output position of the field to post.

• If posting the Optional Endorsement Line (OEL), you can indicate whether to use the bag tag contents line in place of the standard Optional Endorsement Line (OEL) for First-Class, Periodicals, and USPS Marketing Mail automated letters and First-Class and USPS Marketing Mail machinable letters, or First-Class parcels and Automated flats. Use one of the following codes:

4. Page Down for more posting fields.

5. Page Down to define additional fields.

Origin of the OEL

Source Code Definition

M or blank (default) Use the standard option.

B Use the bag tag contents line.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPNA00 M UPCPNA11 Job MYJOB Name/Address Record Posting B

Pos Len [S CODE] Seed Code (w/ compare values) . 188 3 [U CODE] Unique Piece Code (Mail.dat). . [POSTLB] Post Automated rate indicated in OEL? . Y N Use Bag Tag contents line? . . . . . . . M=Std Opt (Dft) B=Bagtag Opt More [POSTLB] options. F20 Specify positions in output record as required: Optional Endorsement Line. . . . . . . . 203 30 [POSTLB] Automated Rate Posting . . . . . . . . . 6 [POSTLB] Barcode Discount Indicator . . . . . . . 1 [POSTLB] Tray Preparation Types . . . . . . . . . 1 [POSTLB] Pallet Destination Information . . . . . 13 [POSTPL] Pallet NDC Sequencing Number . . . . . . 2 [POSTPL] Pallet SCF Sequencing Number . . . . . . 2 [POSTPL] _______________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F6=Update F15=Addl POST F17=Top F18=Bottom F24=Field Search


Chapter 7: Defining Name/Address Record PostingSaving Your Definitions

6. Press F15 for additional posting options. You can scroll through the options by pressing Page Down.

The LABLN definition (below, on screen UPCPNA19) applies to the Mailer's Choice product. It is unlikely that IBM® i users would define any options on this screen.

The POSTNS definition (on screen UPCPNA25) applies to the Mailer's Choice product. It is unlikely that MailStream Plus IBM® i users define any options on this screen.

7. Once you complete your definitions, press F12 to return to the first Name/Address Record Posting screen.


To save your presort definitions:


2. Follow the prompts to save to an external file, or press F3 to save and return to the Define and/or Submit Presort Job screen.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPNA00 UPCPNA19 Job MYJOB Name/Address Record Posting [LABLN] Information to create Inkjet file. Label line number. . . . . . . . . . 1 Move type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . V or C Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pos Len Location/Length component field 1. . If move type equals "V" component field 2. . then first position of component field 3. . component field and component field 4. . length must be specified component field 5. .

More... F6 = Save F12 = Cancel


8
Submitting Batch Jobs
Setting Up a Batch Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Step 1: Generate Statistics Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Step 2: Run the Presort. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Step 3: Post Name/Address Records (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Step 4: Print Reports (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Optional Steps: RTYPES Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Specifying Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Running the Parameter (“Parm”) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Running a Batch Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Reviewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Viewing Parameters for Your Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Setting Up a Batch Job


MailStream Plus batch processing involves these steps:

• Generate statistics records

• Run the presort

• Post the name/address records (optional)

• Print reports (optional)

Use the Submit Batch Job screens (UPCPSB01, UPCPSB02, and UPCPSB03) to run a complete batch job or to define individual job steps for your current presort job.

If you select specific job steps (“Functions,” on screen UPCPSB01), ensure that you defined the corresponding job component(s). If you are running a complete batch job, you must define all of the required job components. To select a step to run, put a 1 in the Opt field next to that step.

Define these additional details:

• Job description: Use the Job Description and Library fields to specify the details to use when jobs are submitted for batch execution. MailStream Plus uses these fields as they were entered, unless you change them at job submit time.

• Job name: Contains a system-generated job name. The name is based on the Job ID and sequence number. The sequence number refers to the number of times the job was submitted. You may change this field at any time.

• Hold on job queue: Use this field to specify whether to “hold” a job until it can run without interfering with interactive or transaction-based jobs (default is N). Change to Y if you want the job to be held on the job queue.

• MailStream Plus Database Library: Use this field to specify the postal reference database file to run with the current batch job.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPSB00 Replace with screen heading desired UPCPSB01 Job MYJOB Submit Batch Job Rls

Select the functions you would like to perform:

1=Select Opt Function RTYPES Processing 1 Generate Statistics records 1 Run Presort 1 Post Name/Address record 1 Print Reports

Job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . @@IVP@00nn

Job description . . . . . . . . . . . QDFTJOBD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QGPL

Hold on job queue? . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N)

MailStream database library. . . . MSDBFILES More...

F3=Exit F6=Submit F7=Parm test


Chapter 8: Submitting Batch JobsSetting Up a Batch Job

Step 1: Generate Statistics Records

You must complete the Mailing Piece Attributes, Define Default Print Outputs (HEADER), Presort Definition (E CODE, ENT PT, and ML TYP) and Name/Address File Layout components to run this step. This step sorts the presort statistics records into a sequence that can be used by the presort program in the next step.

MailStream Plus writes presort statistics to file PSTATxxxxx (where xxxxx is your Job ID), member STPST, in the library you specified to hold job objects.

Step 2: Run the Presort

You must define the Presort Definition component before you can run this step. The presort step uses the records generated in step one to drive the presorting of your input records. The presort step creates a file, DTAILjobid, which includes the following members:

• NANSD – for posting name/address records

• MSMSD – for generating reports in mail sequence

• RPQSD – for generating reports in Qualification sequence

• RPZES – for generating reports in Entry Point sequence

• RPZSD – for generating reports in ZIP Code sequence

Step 3: Post Name/Address Records (Optional)

MailStream Plus requires you to run the presort step and to define the Name/Address Record Posting component to do this step.

This step has two functions: to apply optional fields to your output records and to complete the sequencing control field used to sort your name/address file into final mailing sequence. You do not have to post optional fields to your name/address records to produce reports. However, the posting step affords you the option of customizing your reports by retaining only selected elements in output records.

Step 4: Print Reports (Optional)

Before you can print reports, you must run the presort step. You must also complete the Information for USPS Reports and Report Selection components.

This step prints the reports you select, using the MSMSD (mailing sequence detail), RPQSD (Qualification sequence detail), RPZES (Entry Point sequence detail), and RPZSD (ZIP Code sequence detail) members created in the presort step.



Optional Steps: RTYPES Processing

Put a 1 in the Opt field in front of the RTYPES Processing to include RTYPES processing as part of the batch job.

Specifying Job Details

1. Define the following details (screen UPCPSB02) before submitting your job:

• Input N/A File: Use the Input N/A file, Library, and Member fields to help MailStream Plus locate and read the input file.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPSB00 Replace with screen heading desired UPCPSB01 Job MYJOB Submit Batch Job Rls

Select the functions you would like to perform:

1=Select Opt Function 1 RTYPES Processing 1 Generate Statistics records 1 Run Presort 1 Post Name/Address record 1 Print Reports

Job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . @@IVP@00nn

Job description . . . . . . . . . . . QDFTJOBD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QGPL

Hold on job queue? . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N)

MailStream database library. . . . MSDBFILES More...


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPSB00 UPCPSB02 Job MYJOB Submit Batch Job Rls

Specify input and output file details: Input N/A file . . . . . . . . . . . G1IVPMS Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1IVP Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *FIRST

Output N/A file . . . . . . . . . . . NAMES@IVP@ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1IVP Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NAFWD Record length . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

Produce Rejects output file? N . . . NAMES@IVP@ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1IVP Member. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STREJ

Input Bank file . . . . . . . . . . . Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Member. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More...



Chapter 8: Submitting Batch JobsSetting Up a Batch Job

• Output N/A File: Use the Output N/A file, Library, and Member fields to help MailStream Plus locate and write records to the final output name/address file (mailing sequence).

In all cases where you specify a library, the Library must exist before the job is executed. If the specified file does not exist in that library, MailStream Plus creates it. If the file already exists, MailStream Plus validates the record length. If the named member does not exist, MailStream Plus creates it. If it already exists, MailStream Plus clears it before opening the file.

• Produce Rejects output File?, Library, and Member fields allow you to define the optional rejected output records file.

• Input Bank file, Library, and Member fields allow you to define the name/address bank file, which is optional. note that the Bank file name is not saved between jobs. The bank file name is saved only after a new job is being created. If using an existing job, you must enter the bank file name on the Define/Submit screen.

2. Page down to define additional processing details on screen UPCPSB03.

NOTE: For options that copy files to the Integrated File System (IFS), the files are placed in directory /GROUP1/MS/jobid in ASCII format.

• Create fixed length MAIL.dat files? Requires a Y or N. Enter Y if you are requesting the Mail.dat files to be created as Fixed length files, MDXXXxxxxx. Otherwise, only the variable length MVXXXxxxxx files are created. The default is N.

• Copy Mail.dat files to the IFS? Requires a Y or N. Enter Y if you are requesting to copy the Mail.dat files to the IFS folder. This process creates a path on the root of IFS GROUP1\MS\JOBname. The default is N.

• Mail.dat IFS filename: Provide a file name in two sets of 4 characters. Use format “AAAA 1111" with a space between the letters and numbers.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPSB00 UPCPSB03 Job MYJOB Submit Batch Job Rls

Specify other job options, then press F6 to submit your job: Create fixed length Mail.dat files? . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N) Copy Mail.dat files to the IFS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N) Mail.dat IFS filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create fixed length SSF File? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N)Copy SSF file to the IFS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N)

Create Name Record Control File? . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blank, N, Y

Create fixed length MSBAR/MSTRA file? . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N)

Delete Output N/A file before running this job? . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N) Y=Delete then recreate, useful when output record length changes

BottomF3=Exit F6=Submit F7=Parm test



• Create fixed-length SSF file? Requires a Y or N. Enter Y to create the SSF file. The default is N.

• Copy SSF file to the IFS? Requires a Y or N. Enter Y if you are requesting to copy the SSF file to the IFS folder. This process creates a path on the root of IFS \GROUP1\MS\jobid\SSF.CSV.

• Create Name Record Control File? Allows values Y, N, or blank. A blank allows MailStream Plus to automatically generate the Name Record Control file when the job requires it.

• Create fixed length MSBAR/MSTRA file? Create fixed length MSBAR/MSTRA file. This requires a Y or N. Enter Y if you want to create a Fixed length MSTRAxxxxx file when requesting TRAYTAGS, BAGTAGS or CONTTAGS. Otherwise, only the variable length MVTRAxxxxx file is created The default is N.

• Delete Output N/A (name/address) file before running this job? Enter Y to delete the NAMESxxxxx file before creating a new one. This is recommended if the record length is changing. Enter N to write over the current NAMESxxxxx file.


Chapter 8: Submitting Batch JobsRunning the Parameter (“Parm”) Test

Running the Parameter (“Parm”) Test

Once you define your input files and job components, the verification program ensures that everything is syntactically correct and that established jobs comply with the latest program changes.

MailStream Plus flags all changed parameters, allowing you to easily spot and correct those errors. You don’t have to wait until you run a job to learn about possible errors in the reporting or name/address record processing programs.

You must clear all parameter errors before you can submit your job for processing.

1. While displaying the Submit Batch Job screen UPCPSB03, press F7 to start the verification program. MailStream Plus displays the following screen, indicating that the job is being submitted:

When the parameter test is submitted, MailStream Plus returns you to the regular Submit Batch Job screen display.

2. Using your site’s protocol, access the MailStream Plus Parameter listing, member PRNTRPT (print reports file).

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPSB00 UPCPSB03 Job MYJOB Submit Batch Job

Submitting Job...


Running the Parameter (“Parm”) Test

3. Page through the file to locate any error flags “###”.:

In the above screen, positions 8-10 has been flagged with ###. Most often, this indicates an error.

4. Use the parameter listings in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide for all platforms to correct your parameter errors.

5. If you wish, print the entire report to get a hard copy of all parameters and flagged records.

Display Spooled File File . . . . . : PRNTRPT Page/Line 2/19 Control . . . . . Columns 1 - 78 Find . . . . . . *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+... P ATTR 09000 00900 00495 43560 P ATTR 10000 01000 00535 47080 ML TYP 4 M B ALG PL P ALG PP P ALG CR N N N N Y ALG PS Y Y ALG BC N C N ENT PT 3 2 04 01101 Springfield MA N Y ### More... F3=Exit F12=Cancel F19=Left F20=Right F24=More keys


Chapter 8: Submitting Batch JobsRunning a Batch Job

Running a Batch Job

Once you define all of your job submission details and correct all of your parameter errors (or, if you wish to skip the parameter verification step altogether), you may submit your batch job. To submit and run your job:

1. Define all of the details described in a previous section, Setting Up a Batch Job.

2. Press F6 to submit your job. MailStream Plus displays the following screen, indicating that the job is being submitted for processing:

When the job is submitted, MailStream Plus returns you to the regular Submit Batch Job screen display.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPSB00 Replace with screen heading desired UPCPSB01Job MYJOB Submit Batch Job

Preparing and Submitting Job for Batch Execution


Reviewing Job Output

Reviewing Job Output

1. Using your site’s protocol, access the MailStream Plus output files.

Depending upon your operating environment, your system displays information similar to the following:

The output files are:

• PRNTXLG - Displays each program executed, step run, and shows whether the steps and programs ran to completion

• QPJOBLOG - Shows the details each program executed

• QPPGMMDMP - Contains a program “dump”

• PRNTRPT - Contains all of the standard reports and parameter listings

• MSRPPLT - Contains the pallet tags (not shown on the screen above)

• MSRPSTM - Contains the USPS Postal Statements (not shown on the screen above)

2. Place a 5 in front of the files that you want to view.

Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 6=Release 7=Messages 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status

Opt File User Form Type Pty Date Time PRNTXLG PBBIUSER *STD 5 02/10/YYYY 16:11:25 QPJOBLOG PBBIUSER *STD 5 02/10/YYYY 16:11:29 QPPGMDMP PBBIUSER *STD 5 02/10/YYYY 16:15:53 PRNTRPT PBBIUSER *STD 5 02/10/YYYY 16:15:48

Parameters for options 1, 2, 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 1 F11=View 3 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys


Chapter 8: Submitting Batch JobsViewing Parameters for Your Job

Viewing Parameters for Your Job

The View Parm (parameter) File selection displays a text representation of all parameters you’ve defined for your MailStream Plus job. To view your defined parameters:

1. Press F20 from the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen to display the Parm File Viewer screen.

2. Page Down for additional parameters.

3. Press F3 to return to the Define and/or Submit screen.

UPCPVCRD Parm File Viewer Job MYJOB ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+ HEADER OPEN SYSTEMS MSN UHD1A PREPARED FOR: PITNEY BOWES UHD2A 4200 PARLIAMENT PLACE, SUITE 600 UHD3A LANHAM, MD 20706-1844 UHD1B PREPARED BY: PITNEY BOWES UHD2B 4200 PARLIAMENT PLACE, SUITE 600 UHD3B LANHAM, MD 20706-1844 P ATTR 192 1 P 6.000 10.50 00999 R Y Y CONTRL 193 ZIP IN 163 C 168 C 174 172 C 178 182 C X ML TYP 3 L E CODE 1 191 C 1 ENT PT 20706 PITNEY BOWES Y ALG BC Y Y ALG CR L Y POSTLB 203 More... F3=Back


Viewing Parameters for Your Job


9
Defining Reports
Defining Reports - The Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Defining Reports: Step-by-Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Defining Reports - The Basics


There are three reports that MailStream Plus prints automatically for all jobs: Parameter List, Execution Log, and Control Totals. You cannot turn these reports off, nor can you specify options for these reports. In addition to the automatically generated reports, MailStream Plus provides several optional reports.

This chapter describes the required and optional reports, provides instructions for customizing report headers and footers, and shows you how to define some of the optional reports.

There are four aspects of any output definition:

• Output file definition

• Posting requirements definition

• Defining the appearance of the reports

• Selecting specific reports to print.

We suggest that you define your files with your report requirements in mind. Why? Once you determine your report requirements, you must define your files so that you capture the necessary information. Otherwise, you may not see the report results that you want. For example, if you know that you want to break your reports on batch code, you must define a batch code in your data and in the parameters.

We show you how to use the Information for USPS Reports component to define report variables and the Report Selection component to select reports to print.

You can also define boilerplate information to appear on your printed reports and tags. Using the Report Information (RP INF) parameter, you can define items such as mailer information and pallet tag text. You may define a report more than once, if necessary, to get proper variations of the reports.

The Manifest Report, DuoSort reports, and Pallet Summary appear in the report selection list, even if the MailStream Plus installation is not licensed to use these additional options. MailStream Plus will not produce these items if selected.

Define these specifications using the Work with Reports screens, UPCPRR11 and UPCPRS11, as well as individual report definition screens.

Defining Reports: Step-by-Step

Review the table of available reports in chapter 2 of this guide.

The Work with Reports screens allow you to define the optional reports. These steps start from the Define and/or Submit MailStream Plus Job screen.


Chapter 9: Defining ReportsDefining Reports - The Basics

Defining Report Information Variables

Chapter 2 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide contains a complete listing of all report information variables and sub keywords.

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, type a 2 in front of Information for USPS Reports.

2. Press ENTER to display the initial Information for USPS Reports screen, UPCPRI11.


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPRI00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPRI11 Job MYJOB Information for USPS Reports B [BATINF] [EP INF] [RP INF] (CAPS on) Report Information Table Size . . -- Batch or EP Range -- Item Data Level Low High MDLPCN JOHN DOE G MDLPCO PITNEY BOWES G MDLPCT 800-123-1234 G MDLPPC X123 G MDMFJI IVP G MDLP5S &DZD G MDLPEM [email protected] G MDLPJI IVP G MDLPJN 0001 G WSDATE 01/25/YYYY G MDMFSD 1/20/YYYY01:55 G MDMFCF R P 1234567890123 12345 G CFMAIL 00000001 00000002 G

F3=Exit F6=Update F10=Selections F13=Set CAPS off F17=Top F18=Bottom

Function Keys on Screen UPCPRI11


F3 Exit Exit from the Information for USPS Reports component, without saving the data.

F6 Update Save the data and quit from the Information for USPS Reports component.

F10 Selections Go to the next Information for USPS Reports screen to define specific report information variables.

F13 Set CAPS offSet Caps ON

Turns off/on Caps lock button.

F17 Top Go to the top of the information variables list on screen UPCPRI11.

F18 Bottom Go to the bottom of the information variables list on screen UPCPRI11.



3. Press F10 to define report variables using screen UPCPRI21.

Multiple pages make up the UPCPRI21 screen. If you know the Item you are defining, you can type the item name in the Position to field to scroll directly to that item. You may also page down to see all available report information sub keywords. Chapter 2 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide for all platforms contains a reference to all INF parameters (listed in the Item column of screen UPCPRI21).

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPRI00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPRI21 Job MYJOB Information for USPS Reports B (CAPS on) Supply Data to Select. Level G - Global Low Batch/EP Press Enter. E - EP Range High Batch/EP B - Batch Range Position to: Item Description Len Data (*N interpreted as blank) ACSCOD Address Correction Service Code 8 AGTAD1 Agent Address Line 1 30 AGTAD2 Agent Address Line 2 30 AGTAD3 Agent Address Line 3 30 AGTNAM Agent Name 30 AGTTEL Agent Telephone Number 14 APB Advertising Percent Basis 7 BGLIN4 Bag/Tray Tag Line 4 38 BGLIN5 Bag/Tray Tag Line 5 38 CDAUTO Coded Date Automation 10 CDCARR Coded Date Carrier 10 CFMAIL Confirm/ASN Code 19

F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=Set CAPS off F17=Top F18=Bottom



4. Press ENTER to return to screen UPCPRI11.

Selecting the Reports to Print

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, type a 2 in front of Report Selection.

2. Press ENTER to display the initial Work with Reports screen, UPCPRR11.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPRI00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPRI11 Job MYJOB Information for USPS Reports B [BATINF] [EP INF] [RP INF] (CAPS on) Report Information Table Size . . -- Batch or EP Range -- Item Data Level Low High MDLPCN JOHN DOE G MDLPCO PITNEY BOWES G MDLPCT 800-123-1234 G MDLPPC X123 G MDMFJI IVP G MDLP5S &DZD G MDLPEM [email protected] G MDLPJI IVP G MDLPJN 0001 G WSDATE 01/25/YYYY G MDMFSD 01/25/YYYY901/20/YYYY01:55 G MDMFCF R P 1234567890123 12345 G CFMAIL 00000001 00000002 G


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPRR00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPRR11 Job MYJOB Work with Reports B [REPORT] Type options, press Enter. 4=Delete 12=Work with

Nr Opt Report Description Copy Details Selection

F3=Exit F6=Update F10=Select Report F17=Top F18=Bottom




The sample screen above is blank because no reports are currently defined.

3. Press F10 to go to the Report Selection Screen.

4. Type a 1 in front of each report you want to print for the current job.

We are defining Bag Tags, the Mail Content Audit Report, and the ZIP-Sequence Detail Report for this example.

The Manifest Report, DuoSort reports, and Pallet Summary appear in the report selection list even if the MailStream Plus installation is not licensed to use these additional options. But MailStream Plus will not produce them if selected.

5. Press F18 for additional report selections.

6. Press F17 to return to the top of the report selection list.

7. Press ENTER to define the Bag Tags report (screen UPCRBT01).

Now you must define selection criteria for all reports and the report content and appearance for each individual report.

Defining Selection Criteria For All Reports

For each report you define, you can specify the number of copies to print, and the presorting levels to include. On the first Report Selection screen, UPCRBT01 (below), notice how the screen is organized in two parts:

• The section under “Specify Report content and appearance” contains the fields in which to define the appearance of the bag/tray tags

Function Keys on Screen UPCPRR11


F3 Exit Exit from the Work with Reports component, without saving the data.

F6 Update Save the data and quit from the Work with Reports component.

F10 Select Report Go to the next Work with Reports screen ()

F17 Top Go to the top of the defined reports list on screen UPCPRR11.

F18 Bottom Go to the bottom of the defined reports list on screen UPCPRR11.



• The positions under “Enter Report Selection Criteria if required” contains the selection criteria fields. These are the fields you use to define the amount of information or content included in your report. You can use the same criteria for all reports, if you wish.

Since these fields pertain to all reports, we describe them once, below. Note that some of the following options may not appear for all reports.

To learn more about the options for any reports not defined in this chapter, see the discussion of the individual REPORT parameters in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide. The tables for each REPORT parameter describe all of the available options and map to the IBM® i CHUI screens.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCRBT00 UPCRBT01 Job MYJOB Report Selection [REPORT BAGTAGS] Bag Tags Specify Report content and appearance: Default Choices Space before line #1. . . . . . 3 1-9 A B C Space before line #2. . . . . . 1 1-9 A B C Space before line #3. . . . . . 1 1-9 A B C Space before line #4. . . . . . A 1-9 A B C Vertical tags per page. . . . . 8 1-99 Horizontal tags per row . . . . 4 1-4 Columns between tags. . . . . . 34 30-41 Print orientation . . . . . . . NS NS EW Suppress line #4 printing . . . P P S Pages of alignment to print . . 0 0-9 Container type on break records N Y N Enter Report Selection Criteria if required: Auto Mach N-A A-C E-C Plt Carr P-S Res Mach Pre Copies Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Rate Rate Rate Mail

F3=Exit F6=Accept

Global Report Selection Criteria Definitions – All Optional Reports (Part 1 of 3)

Field Description Possible Values

Copies Number of copies of this report to print. Default is 1.

Specify a value from 1 through 9

NOTE: This field is ignored for REPORT BAGTAGS, REPORT TRAYTAGS, and REPORT CONTTAGS.

Auto Mail Automated Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the Automated portion of the mailing

A Report automated mail

N Do not report automated mail

X Print all levels of detail — automation and non-automation — on the report

blank Default is X



Mach Mail Machinable Mailing Selection- Code indicating whether to report the Machinable portion of the mailing

U Report Machinable mail.

N No, do not report Machinable mail.

X Include in report.

blank Default is X.

N-A Mail Non-Automated Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the non-Automated portion of the mailing

O Report non-automated mail

N Do not report non-automated mail

X Print all levels of detail — non-automated and automated — on the report

blank Default is X

A-C Mail Automated Carrier Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the Automated Carrier portion of the mailing

C Report automated carrier mail

N Do not report automated carrier mail

X Print all levels of detail — automated carrier and non-automated carrier — on the report

blank Default is X

E-C Mail Enhanced Carrier Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the enhanced carrier route portion of the mailing

E Report enhanced carrier mail

N Do not report enhanced carrier mail

X Print all levels of detail — enhanced carrier and non-enhanced carrier — on the report

blank Default is X

Plt Mail Palletized Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the palletized portion of the mailing, if any

P Report Palletized mail only

N Do not report Palletized mail

X Print all levels of detail — palletized and non-palletized — on the report

blank Default is X

Carr Rate Carrier Route Rate Selection - Code indicating whether to report the Carrier Route rate portion of the mailing

Y Report Carrier Route rate mail.

N Do not report Carrier Route rate mail.

blank Default is Y

P-S Rate Include 5-digit Rate - Define whether the Presort rate portion of the mailing should be reported

Y Report Presort rate mail.

N Do not report Presort rate mail.

blank Default is Y for all reports except REPORT FACESLIP.





Defining the Bag Tags Report Appearance

This screen allows you to define the appearance of the non-automation bag tags. For this example we are using all of the appearance defaults. We are also reporting the automation portion of the mail.

1. Tab to the Copies field at the bottom of the screen. Enter a 1 in the Copies field.

Res Rate Include Basic/Residual Rate - Code indicating whether to report the Basic/Residual rate portion of the mailing

Y Report Basic/Residual rate mail

N Do not report Basic/Residual rate mail

blank Default is Y

Machine Presorted Mail

Machine (Non-USPS) Presort Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the non-USPS presorted portion of the mailing

A (print automation only) Print only the automation-compatible portion of the mailing.

O Report non-Automated (manual) mail only.

B Report the barcoded portion only.

X Include in report; allows machine presorted mail data to be reported along with other groups of mail.

N No, do not report machine-presorted mail; report all others specified.

blank Default is X



MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCRBT00 UPCRBT01 Job MYJOB Report Selection [REPORT BAGTAGS] Bag Tags Specify Report content and appearance: Default Choices Space before line #1. . . . . . 3 1-9 A B C Space before line #2. . . . . . 1 1-9 A B C Space before line #3. . . . . . 1 1-9 A B C Space before line #4. . . . . . A 1-9 A B C Vertical tags per page. . . . . 8 1-99 Horizontal tags per row . . . . 4 1-4 Columns between tags. . . . . . 34 30-41 Print orientation . . . . . . . NS NS EW Suppress line #4 printing . . . P P S Pages of alignment to print . . 0 0-9 Container type on break records N Y N Enter Report Selection Criteria if required: Auto Mach N-A A-C E-C Plt Carr P-S Res Mach Pre Copies Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Rate Rate Rate Mail

F3=Exit F6=Accept



2. Enter an A under the Auto Mail selection.

3. Press F6 to accept the Bag Tags definition and display the Mail Content Audit Trail screen, UPCRAT01.

Defining the Mail Content Audit Trail Report

For this example, we are using the defaults under the Content and Appearance section. We are also printing one copy and including the Automation Mail portion on the report.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCRBT00 UPCRBT01 Job MYJOB Report Selection [REPORT BAGTAGS] Bag Tags Specify Report content and appearance: Default Choices Space before line #1. . . . . . 3 1-9 A B C Space before line #2. . . . . . 1 1-9 A B C Space before line #3. . . . . . 1 1-9 A B C Space before line #4. . . . . . A 1-9 A B C Vertical tags per page. . . . . 8 1-99 Horizontal tags per row . . . . 4 1-4 Columns between tags. . . . . . 34 30-41 Print orientation . . . . . . . NS NS EW Suppress line #4 printing . . . P P S Pages of alignment to print . . 0 0-9 Container type on break records N Y N Enter Report Selection Criteria if required: Auto Mach N-A A-C E-C Plt Carr P-S Res Mach PreCopies Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Rate Rate Rate Mail 1 A

F3=Exit F6=Accept

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCRAT00 UPCRAT01 Job MYJOB Report Selection Mail Content Audit Trail [REPORT AUDITTRL]

Specify Report content and appearance: Default Choices Finest level of detail. . . . . DTL PLT BAG PKG DTL New page for each pallet. . . . N Y N Cumulative column for PKG/DTL . N Y N Page & cumulative totals. . . . Y Y N Reset page & cumulative totals. N E B N

Enter Report Selection Criteria if required: Auto Mach N-A A-C E-C Plt Carr P-S Res Mach Pre Copies Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Rate Rate Rate Mail

F3=Exit F6=Accept



1. Tab to the Copies field at the bottom of the screen.

2. Type a 1 under Copies.

3. Type an A under Auto Mail.

4. Press F6 to accept your specifications and display screen UPCRZS01, ZIP Sequence Detail Report.

Defining the ZIP Sequence Detail Report

For this example, we are using the defaults under the Content and Appearance section. We are also printing one copy and including the Automation Mail portion on the report.

1. Tab to the Copies field at the bottom of the screen.

2. Type a 1 under Copies.

3. Type an A under Auto Mail.

4. Press F6 to accept your specifications and return screen UPCPRS11.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCRZS00 UPCRZS01 Job MYJOB Report Selection ZIP Sequence Detail Report [REPORT ZSDETAIL] Specify Report contents and appearance: Default Choices Finest level of detail . . . . . XRF EPT BAT 3DG ZIP CRT XRF Page & cumulative totals . . . . Y Y N Reset page & cumulative totals . N B E N

Enter Report Selection Criteria if required: Auto Mach N-A A-C E-C Plt Carr P-S Res Mach Pre Copies Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Rate Rate Rate Mail

F3=Exit F6=Accept



5. Press F12 to return to the initial Work with Reports screen.

The screen shows the reports you have defined for the current job. You may type 12 in front of any of the selected reports to display its definition screen, allowing you to change individual report definitions.


To save your report definitions:



MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPRR00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPRR11 Job MYJOB Work with Reports B

Type options, press Enter. 4=Delete 12=Work with

Nr Opt Report Description Copy Details Selection Bag Tags 1 A Mail Content Audit Report 1 A ZIP-Sequence Detail Report 1 A

F3=Exit F6=Update F10=Select Report F17=Top F18=Bottom


10
Job Setup Examples
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Special Presorts You Can Do with MailStream Plus . . . . . . . . . .116 What is Reverse Presorting (Re-Allocation)? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Defining Reverse Presorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 First-Class Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Defining Automation Postcards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Defining Automation Flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Defining Presorted Parcels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Periodicals Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Defining Automation Flats, Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

USPS Marketing Mail Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Defining a Machinable Presorted Letters Mailing . . . . . . . . . . .133 Defining Presorted (Non-Automation) Flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Defining Enhanced Carrier Route/Manual Letters . . . . . . . . . .137

Package Services Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Defining Bound Printed Matter Mailings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

SCF Drop Shipment Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Other SCF Drop Shipment Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Using the DRPKEY Report Information (RP INF) Subkeyword .149 Determine the USPS Facility Drop Site Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Using MAIL360™ to Number Intelligent Mail Barcodes . . . . . . .154 MAIL360/Intelligent Mail Barcode Parameter Records . . . . . . .155 Defining MAIL360 Intelligent Mail Barcode Processing . . . . . .156 Example: IM® Barcoding, USPS Marketing Mail Letter Presorts . .

174

Introduction

Introduction

This chapter describes and demonstrates how to presort some of the most-requested mailpiece types and mail categories. We provide step-by-step instructions for defining some specialized presort jobs, and give tips for defining your processing options.

This chapter shows the key optional parameter records for each example that you may add to your JCL and/or scripts, to perform “specialized” processing. These parameter records would replace the same parameter records defined in chapters 3-8 of this guide. Remember to also include the required parameter records for your jobs.

Special Presorts You Can Do with MailStream Plus

In addition to the “basic” jobs you can define with MailStream Plus, you may want to perform some more advanced presorting from time to time. This chapter shows you the parameter records, parameter record field options, and reports you must specify in order to do some of the non-standard presort types. We cover:

• Reverse presorting

• First-Class

• Automation postcards

• Automation flats

• Presorted parcels

• Periodicals

• Non-profit publications

• Automation flats


• Machinable presorted letters

• Presorted flats

• Enhanced Carrier Route/Manual letters

• Package Services bound printed matter

• SCF drop shipments

Using the examples in this chapter, you can construct some additional piece type/mail class presorts of your own. Each example assumes specific mailpiece characteristics, which we use for illustration purposes. Follow these examples, substituting your own details.

What is Reverse Presorting (Re-Allocation)?

An SCF is a postal facility that serves as a processing and distribution center for post offices in a designated geographic area.


Chapter 10: Job Setup ExamplesWhat is Reverse Presorting (Re-Allocation)?

Reverse presorting, or re-allocation, refers to the process of taking mailpieces from finer-level pallets in order to create new, less finely sorted pallets that are not created otherwise. In this process, pallets must maintain minimum weight and volume requirements for the original pallet (the pallet that is borrowed from). An example of reverse presorting would be to take bundles from a 5- or 3-digit pallet to create a new Sectional Center Facility (SCF) pallet. The area is defined by the first three digits of the ZIP Codes of those post offices in that area.

For more information about the different presort levels, see the Domestic Mail Manual.

Currently, for flats, mailers are required to prepare SCF pallets after preparing required 5-digit and optional 3-digit pallets. Mailers often choose to create 3-digit pallets when preparing regional or high-volume mailings. Generally, the creation of 3-digit pallets for a job improves delivery. However, there are instances where the preparation of 3-digit pallets causes mail, that would otherwise be prepared on SCF pallets, to fall to a less finely sorted pallet. For example, if an SCF serves multiple 3-digit ZIP Codes areas with both high- and low-density 3-digit ZIP Code zones, and a mailer creates 3-digit pallets, it’s likely the mailing has enough volume to meet the minimum pallet weight for the high-density 3-digit ZIP Codes, but not enough volume in the lower-density 3-digit zones. As a result, the mail that does not meet the minimum weight is allocated to another pallet level (such as ADC). The result is inconsistent delivery, because some mail is heading directly to the SCF on 5-digit and 3-digit pallets, while the remaining mail enters the postal system at a higher level (above the SCF), and then has to work its way down to the SCF level. Consequently, it could take much longer for these mailpieces to reach their destinations.

MailStream Plus allows you to optimize SCF palletization without necessarily eliminating 3-digit pallets. This process prevents sortation to the 3-digit pallet level when such preparation results in less-than-optimal SCF palletization. MailStream Plus pulls the minimum amount of mail necessary from high-density pallets at a finer sortation to create a new SCF pallet that would is not created otherwise. This process draws mail back to the SCF pallet level from the ADC and NDC levels and allows mailers to palletize more mail.

Defining Reverse Presorting

The following example shows you how to do a reverse presort.

Use screen UPCPPD10 (in the Presort Definition component) to define the class of mail and mail category. Use screen UPCPPA11 (in the Mailing Piece Attributes component) to define the mailpiece attributes, rate type, and automation compatibility.

Remember these “rules” for defining reverse presorts:

• SCF Reverse presorting is available for USPS Marketing Mail bundled flats and Periodicals bundled flats and irregular parcels — not for letters.

• The default is to perform reverse presorting for USPS Marketing Mail bundled flats.

• You must create bundled pallets to do a reverse presort.



Defining Reverse Presorting, Step-by-Step

From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen:

1. Enter 2 or 6 in front of Presort Definition. Press ENTER to display the Presort Definition Screen.

2. Specify one of the following Class of Mail and Mail Category codes:

3. In the Total length field, specify the length of your entry point codes.

4. Tab to the Entry Point definition fields. For each entry point code component, define the Position (Posn), Length (Len), and Format (Fmt) of the first entry point code. Define additional component fields if necessary.

5. Press F10 to define the reverse presort using screen UPCPPD20.

6. In the Type of Palletization field, specify P to indicate the type of palletization is bundles-on-pallets.

7. Enter a Y in the Perform SCF Reverse Presort field. Press F6 to return to the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPPD10 Job MYJOB Presort Definition [ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 3 4 Mail Category . . . . . . . . . F F I L M P Presort Type . . . . . . . . . . . C R [E CODE] Define entry point components: Total length: 1 Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt 1. 191 1 C 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. To define entry point definitions, press appropriate F-key: [TABLSZ] Entry Point Table Size .: [EP ROL] Entry Point Roll . . : F20 [DSRSEL] Presort Manager. . . . .: F12 [ADC PT] ADC drop shipping. . : F21 [ENTRYP] Entry Group Number . . .: F14 [BATCHP] Batch Group Number . : F22 [ENT PT] ZIP Code entry points. .: F17 D [EP EXC] Exclusion Entry Points F23 [NDC PT] Mail Center entry points: F18 [ENT SQ] Entry Point Sequence : F24 [SCF PT] Facility entry points..: F19 More... F3=Exit F6=Update F10=Additional parameters F13=Specify Qualifying Amounts F15=Add EP Cards

Class Category

2 Periodicals; F - Flats

3 USPS Marketing Mail; F - Flats



8. Enter 2 or 6 in front of Mailing Piece Attributes. Press ENTER to display the Mailing Piece Attributes screen.

9. If you have not done so, define your piece attributes:

a. Specify the Piece ID Location and Length. This field is required to define the starting location of the Piece ID code.

b. Specify the Piece ID code. For example, this piece ID code could be called BOUNDPM indicating Bound Printed Matter.

c. Specify the Weight per 100 [Pieces] (In pounds). This field is required to determine the cost of the mailing.

d. Specify the Thickness per 100 [Pieces] (In inches). This field is required to calculate the volume of your total mailing.

e. Specify the Height of 1 [Mailpiece] (in inches). This field is required. Use one of the mailpieces that you measured in the previous step.

f. Specify the Length of 1 [Mailpiece] (in inches). This field is required. Use the mailpiece from the previous step.

g. (Optional) Specify the Volume per 100 [Mailpieces] (in cubic inches) field. This field accommodates 1-6 numeric or decimal characters. If you have entered the mail piece length and height, then you do not need to enter the Volume.

h. Press F11 to view additional options.

i. If this is a Periodicals mailing, enter the Percentage of Advertising.

j. Define the Rate Type field. MailStream Plus requires this field to calculate the postage rate for this mailing. The applicable rate codes are:

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPPA00 M UPCPPA11 Job MYJOB Mailing Piece Attributes B [P ATTR] Specify Piece-ID table details: Piece-ID Location. . . . . . 192 Length . . . . . . . . . . . 1 [TABLSZ] Piece-ID Table Size .

[P ATTR] Specify Piece-ID attributes: View 1 of 4. F11=More ---> +---------------------------------+ OR +-----------+ Piece ID Weight Thickness Height Length Volume or per 100 per 100 of 1 of 1 per 100 *BLANKS (In pounds) (In inches) (In inches) (In inches) (In Cubic Inches) REVPSORT 6.250 12.50 08.500 11.00 00999

F3=Exit F6=Update F11=More P ATTR options F17=Top F18=Bottom F24=Field Search F13=PA INF CARDS



10. Enter the Rate Type Footnote. MailStream Plus requires this field to calculate the postage rate for this mailing.


C - Classroom Periodicals

D - Double Postcard First-Class

L - Library Package Services

N - Non-Profit • Periodicals


P - Postcard First-Class

R - Regular (default) All classes

S - Science of Agriculture– or –S - Media Mail

• Periodicals

• Package Services

U - Commercial Base Priority Mail and First-Class Parcels

V - Commercial PLUS Priority Mail


B - Priority Balloon Rate Priority Mail

C - Catalog Rate USPS Marketing Mail flats

E - Priority Mail flat-rate envelope provided by the USPS Priority Mail

F = Fulfillment Parcels - there is no default; however, a value is required for USPS Marketing Mail parcels

USPS Marketing Mail parcels

G - Priority Mail flat rate box provided by the USPS Priority Mail

H - Critical Mail Letters Priority Mail Commercial Plus

I - Critical Mail Flats Priority Mail Commercial Plus

J - Priority Mail large flat rate box provided by the USPS Priority Mail

K- Priority Mail large Priority Mail, for APO/FPO deliveries

L -Priority Legal flat-rate envelope Priority Mail

M = Marketing Parcels - there is no default; however, a value is required for USPS Marketing Mail parcels

USPS Marketing Mail parcels



a. Define the Non-Subscriber Type for Periodicals Mail:

b. Press F11 to view additional options.

c. Specify one of the following codes in the Auto-Compatible/Machinable Piece Ind field:

N - Non-Catalog Rate USPS Marketing Mail flats (default)

O - Priority small flat-rate box Priority Mail

P - Priority flat-rate padded envelope Priority Mail Commercial Plus

R - Regular (default) Default for Priority Mail

U - Cubic Prices Priority Mail Commercial Plus

X - Regional Rate Box A Priority Commercial Plus and Commercial Base

Y - Regional Rate Box B Priority Commercial Plus and Commercial Base


Code Definition

R Non-subscribers are over the 10% allowance.

U or blank Non-subscribers do not exceed 10% of the total mailing (default).

Code Definition

Y Indicates that pieces with this attribute are automation compatible, or are a Machinable Parcel (valid for USPS Marketing Mail and Package Services mail classes).

N Mail is not automation-compatible. This is the default definition.

F FSM1000 mailpiece; for Periodicals only.

Valid values for Periodicals are:

Letters: Y or N (default)

Flats: Flats: Y (default), F, or S

Irregular: N is the only option/default

S Non-machinable Periodicals flats, for Periodicals only.

X The piece is not automation compatible but the non-machinable surcharge does not apply.



d. Specify one of the following options in the Ride Along/Enclosure field to indicate whether

there are Ride-Along pieces in a mailing:

e. If E is defined in the previous step, define one of the following Enclosure Mail Type codes

for Periodicals Mail:

f. Press F11 to view the fourth/final view of this screen.

11. Specify whether this is the default set of piece attributes in the Piece Attributes Default Indicator field.

You may designate only one default piece attributes definition.


13. Specify one of the following Class of Mail and Mail Category codes:

Code Definition

H or blank Host piece

E Enclosure/attachment piece

R Ride-along piece

Z Enclosure/attachment piece - Identical to the “E” enclosure class definition, with the exception that the Mail.dat component file (.cpt) is marked “Z” for inclusion as part of the host postage.

Code Definition

L Letter

F Flat

C Card

D Double postcard

R Repositionable note attachment

blank Defaults to the mail type defined for the current job.

Class Category

2 Periodicals; F - Flats

3 USPS Marketing Mail; F - Flats


Chapter 10: Job Setup ExamplesFirst-Class Examples

First-Class Examples

This section contains examples for automation postcards, automation flats, and presorted parcels.

Defining Automation Postcards

QUICK TIP: Use screen UPCPPD10 (in the Presort Definition component) to define the class of mail and mail category.

Use screen UPCPPA11 (in the Mailing Piece Attributes component) to define the mailpiece attributes, rate code, and automation compatibility. Enter a P in the Rate Type field of the Mailing Piece Attributes screen and put a L in the Mail Category field on the Presort Definition screen. Remember these “rules” for defining automation postcards:

• Use the Presort Definition screen (UPCPPD10) to define First-Class Letters (in USPS parlance, postcards are considered a type of letter).

• Use the Mailing Piece Attributes screen (UPCPPA11) to define physical mailing piece characteristics.

• Define one set of piece attributes for each variance in weight or physical dimensions.

Defining Automation Postcards, Step-by-Step

1. Enter 2 or 6 in front of Presort Definition.

2. Press ENTER to display the Presort Definition Screen.

3. Enter 1 in the Class of Mail field to indicate First-Class Mail.

4. Enter L in the Mail Category field, indicating that you are preparing letters. The Rate Type on the Mailing Piece Attributes screen must be P for Postcard.


[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . 1 1 2 3 4 Mail Category. . . . . . . . . L F L P Presort Type . . . . . . . . . _ T R

[E CODE] Define entry point components: Total length: 1 Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt 1. _191 1 C 2. ____ _ _ 3. ____ _ _ 4. ____ _ _ 5. ____ _ _ 6. ____ _ _ 7. ____ _ _ 8. ____ _ _ To define entry point definitions, press appropriate F-key: [TABLSZ] Entry Point Table Size .: [EP ROL] Entry Point Roll . . : F20 [DSRSEL] Presort Manager. . . . .: F12 [ADC PT] ADC drop shipping. . : F21 [ENTRYP] Entry Group Number . . .: F14 [BATCHP] Batch Group Number . : F22 [ENT PT] ZIP Code entry points. .: F17 D [EP EXC] Exclusion Entry Points F23 [NDC PT] Mail Center entry points: F18 [ENT SQ] Entry Point Sequence : F24 [SCF PT] Facility entry points. .: F19 Bottom F3=Exit F6=Update F10=Additional parameters F13=Specify Qualifying Amounts F15=Add EP Cards



5. Press F6 to save your definitions and return to the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen.

6. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, type 2 or 6 in front of Mailing Piece Attributes to display the Mailing Piece Attributes screen.


a. Specify the Piece ID Location and Length. This field is required to define the starting location of the Piece ID code. For example, this piece ID code could be called POSTCARD indicating a postcard.

b. Specify the Weight per 100 [Pieces] (In pounds). This field is required to determine the cost of the mailing.

c. Specify the Thickness per 100 [Pieces] (In inches). This field is required to calculate the volume of your total mailing.

d. Specify the Height of 1 [Mailpiece] (in inches). This field is required. Use one of the mailpieces that you measured in the previous step.

e. Specify the Length of 1 [Mailpiece] (in inches). This field is required. Use the mailpiece from the previous step.

f. (Optional) Specify the Volume per 100 [Mailpieces] (in cubic inches) field. This field accommodates 1-6 numeric or decimal characters.

g. Press F11 to view additional options.

Note that when you press F11, the Piece ID or *BLANKS column does not scroll.

h. Enter P (for Postcard) in the special postage rate in the Rate Type field.

i. Press F11 to view additional options.

j. Enter Y in the Auto-Compatible/Machinable Piece Ind field to indicate that your mailing is automation-compatible.

k. Press F11 to view the fourth/final view of this screen.

8. Specify whether this is the default piece attributes definition: enter a Y in the Piece Attributes Default Indicator field.



You have completed your automation postcards definition!



Defining Automation Flats

Use screen UPCPPD10 (in the Presort Definition component) to define the class of mail and mail category. Use screen UPCPPA11 (in the Mailing Piece Attributes component) to define the mailpiece attributes, rate type, and automation compatibility. To process flats, put an F in the Mail Category field on the Presort Definition screen and put an R in the Rate Type field on the Mailing Piece Attributes screen.

Remember these “rules” for defining automation flats:

• You must define the Automation Presort option.

• Use the Presort Definition screen to define First-Class flats.

• Use the Mailing Piece Attributes screen to define the regular mail rate for flats mail.

• You must define one set of piece attributes for each variance in weight or physical dimensions between mailpieces.

Defining Automation Flats, Step-by-Step





4. Enter F in the Mail Category field, indicating that you are preparing flats.

5. Press F10 for additional parameter records; Page down to the ALG BC screen.

6. Enter Y in the Automation Presort field.


[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . 1 1 2 3 4 Mail Category. . . . . . . . . F F L P Presort Type . . . . . . . . . _ T R

[E CODE] Define entry point components: Total length: 1 Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt 1. _191 1 C 2. ____ _ _ 3. ____ _ _ 4. ____ _ _ 5. ____ _ _ 6. ____ _ _ 7. ____ _ _ 8. ____ _ _ To define entry point definitions, press appropriate F-key: [TABLSZ] Entry Point Table Size .: [EP ROL] Entry Point Roll . . : F20 [DSRSEL] Presort Manager. . . . .: F12 [ADC PT] ADC drop shipping. . : F21 [ENTRYP] Entry Group Number . . .: F14 [BATCHP] Batch Group Number . : F22 [ENT PT] ZIP Code entry points. .: F17 D [EP EXC] Exclusion Entry Points F23 [NDC PT] Mail Center entry points: F18 [ENT SQ] Entry Point Sequence : F24 [SCF PT] Facility entry points. .: F19 Bottom F3=Exit F6=Update F11=Pallet MIN/MAX F13=Specify Qualifying Amounts F15=Add EP Cards






a. Specify the Piece ID Location and Length. This field is required to define the starting location of the Piece ID code.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPPD35 Job MYJOB Presort Definition Specify automation-compatible presorting parameters: [ALG BC] Specify automation-compatible presorting parameters: Automation Presort? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y Y N Y = Yes, if possible (default for letters) N = No (default for non-letters) Attempt Machinable Qualification? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y Y N Y = Yes, if possible (default) N = No

Min. ZIP+4 Pieces for Automated Presorting. . . . . . . . . . . 1234

More...

F3=Exit F6=Update

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPPA00 M UPCPPA11 Job MYJOB Mailing Piece Attributes B [P ATTR] Specify Piece-ID table size, location and length, press enter. Piece-ID Location. . . . 192 Length . . . 1 [TABLSZ] [P ATTR] Piece-ID Table Size. . .

[P ATTR] Specify Piece-ID attributes: View 1 of 4. F11=More ---> +---------------------------------+ OR +-----------+ Piece ID Weight Thickness Height Length Volume or per 100 per 100 of 1 of 1 per 100 *BLANKS (In pounds) (In inches) (In inches) (In inches) (In Cubic Inches) 1CFLATS 12.500 30.00 08.500 11.00 F3=Exit F6=Update F11=More P ATTR options F17=Top F18=Bottom F24=Field Search F13=PA INF CARDS



b. Specify the Piece ID code. For example, this piece ID code could be 1CFLATS.





g. (Optional) Specify the Volume per 100 [Mailpieces] (in cubic inches) field. This field accommodates 1-6 numeric or decimal characters.


i. Enter R (for Regular) in the Rate Type field.

j. Press F11 to view additional options.

k. Enter Y in the Auto-Compatible/Machinable Piece Ind field to indicate that your mailing is automation-compatible.

l. Press F11 to view the fourth/final view of this screen.

m. Enter Y in the Piece Attributes Default Indicator field if this is your default piece attribute definition.





Defining Presorted Parcels

Use screen UPCPPD10 (in the Presort Definition component) to define the class of mail and mail category. Use screen UPCPPA11 (in the Mailing Piece Attributes component) to define mailpiece attributes, rate code, and automation compatibility.

Remember these “rules” for defining presorted parcels:

• Use the Presort Definition screen to define parcels.

• Use the Mailing Piece Attributes screen to define the mail rate.

• You must define one set of piece attributes for each variance in weight or physical dimensions between mailpieces.

Defining Presorted Parcels, Step-by-Step




4. Enter P in the Mail Category field, indicating that you are mailing parcels.


6. Enter 2 or 6 in front of Mailing Piece Attributes to display the Mailing Piece Attributes screen.

7. Define your piece attributes:

a. Specify the Piece ID Location. This field is required to define the starting location of the Piece ID code.

b. Specify the Piece ID code. For example, this piece ID code could be PSPARC for “presorted parcels.”


[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . 1 1 2 3 4 Mail Category. . . . . . . . . P F L P Presort Type . . . . . . . . . T R

[E CODE] Define entry point components: Total length: 1 Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt Posn Len Fmt 1. 191 1 C 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. To define entry point definitions, press appropriate F-key: [TABLSZ] Entry Point Table Size .: [EP ROL] Entry Point Roll . . : F20 [DSRSEL] Presort Manager. . . . .: F12 [ADC PT] ADC drop shipping. . : F21 [ENTRYP] Entry Group Number . . .: F14 [BATCHP] Batch Group Number . : F22 [ENT PT] ZIP Code entry points. .: F17 D [EP EXC] Exclusion Entry Points F23 [NDC PT] Mail Center entry points: F18 [ENT SQ] Entry Point Sequence : F24 [SCF PT] Facility entry points. .: F19 More... F3=Exit F6=Update F10=Additional parameters F11=Pallet MIN/MAX F13=Specify Qualifying Amounts F15=Add EP Cards









i. Enter R (for Regular) in the special postage rate in the Rate Type field.


k. Enter N in the Auto-Compatible/Machinable Piece Ind field to indicate that your mailing is not automation-compatible.





9. Press F11 to display the remaining piece attribute fields. Disregard these fields for this mailing.


You have completed your presorted parcels definition!


Periodicals Examples


• You must define the Automation Presort option.

• For Periodicals mail, you must define your presort type on screen UPCPPD10.

• You must define at least one Piece Attributes definition (screen UPCPPA11), and mark it as the default.

Defining Automation Flats, Step-by-Step



2. Enter 2 in the Class of Mail field to indicate Periodicals Mail.

3. Enter F in the Mail Category field, for flats.

4. Enter P in the Periodical Presort Type field for “ordinary” Periodicals.

5. Press F10 to display additional parameter records.


[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . 2 1 2 3 4 Mail Category. . . . . . . . . F F L I Presort Type . . . . . . . . . P N P



Chapter 10: Job Setup ExamplesPeriodicals Examples

6. Page Down to the ALG BC screen.

7. Enter Y in Automation Presort field.



10. Specify your piece ID details:

a. Specify the Piece ID starting location and length in the appropriate fields. These fields are required.

b. Specify the Piece ID code. For example, this piece ID code is AUTOFLAT.







i. Define the Percentage of Advertising. For example, if advertising comprises 15% of a mailpiece, enter 15.00 in this field.

j. Enter R (for Regular) in the special postage rate in the Rate Type field.

k. Press F11 to view additional options.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPPD35 Job MYJOB Presort Definition Specify automation-compatible presorting parameters: [ALG BC] Specify automation-compatible presorting parameters: Automation Presort? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y Y N Y = Yes, if possible (default for letters) N = No (default for non-letters) Attempt Machinable Qualification? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y Y N Y = Yes, if possible (default) N = No

Min. ZIP+4 Pieces for Automated Presorting. . . . . . . . . . . 1234

More...

F3=Exit F6=Update



l. Enter Y in the Auto-Compatible/Machinable Piece Ind field to indicate that your mailing is not automation-compatible.

m. Specify one of the following codes in the Ride Along/Enclosure field to indicate whether

there are Ride-Along pieces in your Periodicals mailing:

n. Press F11 to view the fourth/final view of this screen.

o. Enter Y in the Piece Attributes Default Indicator field if this is your default piece attribute definition.


11. Press F13 to display define your report information on screen UPCPPA14.

a. Enter the Piece Attribute Code in the P ATTR Code field. Our example requires code P.

b. Enter the PA INF Subkeyword and PA INF Text Information in those respective fields. Our

example uses the following items:

Code Definition

H Host Piece

E Enclosure/attachment piece

R Ride-Along pieces

blank Default is H.

Subkeyword – DescriptionText

Information

MDLPVN – Periodicals volume number 00321 00226

MDLPAT – Format code:

B Percentage of advertising not counted

S Carries own Advertising Percentage

N Not applicable

default blank

N

PUBLNM – Publication name (or description).

• The default in *.MPU is blank.

• The default in *.CPT is the piece attributes code and a short description.

PBBI DAILY

PUBLNR – Publication number (Periodicals Mail only).

• Must be numeric. The default is blank

• Required for PostalOne!® for Periodicals Mail

• This field must be left-justified (with no zero-padding.)

43

UNANO – Mailer/owner’s USPS Nonprofit Authorization Number used on the postage statement

1234567890


Chapter 10: Job Setup ExamplesUSPS Marketing Mail Examples

12. Press F6 to save and return to the Mailing Piece Attributes screen.

13. Press F6 once again to save your definitions.

You have completed your Automation Flats mailing definition.

USPS Marketing Mail Examples

This section contains examples for setting up three types of USPS Marketing Mail jobs:

• Machinable Presorted Letters

• Presorted Flats

• Enhanced Carrier Route/Manual Letters

Defining a Machinable Presorted Letters Mailing

QUICK TIP: Use screen UPCPPD10 (in the Presort Definition component) to define the class of mail and mail category. Use screen UPCPPA11 (in the Mailing Piece Attributes component) to define the mailpiece attributes, rate type, and automation compatibility.

Machinable refers to letter-mail that the USPS can process with a multi-line optical character reader (MLOCR) to apply a barcode. Remember these “rules” for defining machinable presorted letters mailings:

• A machinable mailpiece is designed to be automation compatible, but:

• Does not contain the delivery point barcode (DPBC) information; or,

• Has the DPBC information, but you are not adding a barcode on the mailpiece.

• If your mailing has mixed pieces (DPBC and non-DPBC), and you want to qualify both types, specify Y to attempt automation presort.

• The following example shows how to define the standard parameter records for USPS Marketing Mail machinable letters job.

• Both the Mailing Piece Attributes and Presort Definitions screens must be completed.

Defining Machinable Presorted Letters, Step-by-Step





2. Enter 3 in the Class of Mail field to indicate USPS Marketing Mail. Press ENTER.

3. MailStream Plus changes the Mail Categories for the USPS Marketing Mail class.

4. Enter L in the Mail Category field, indicating that you are preparing letters.




[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 3 4 Mail Category. . . . . . . . . L F L P Presort Type . . . . . . . . . T R


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPPA00 M UPCPPA11 Job MYJOB Mailing Piece Attributes B [P ATTR] Specify Piece-ID table details. Piece-ID Location. . . . . . 192 Length . . . . . . . . . . . 1 [TABLSZ] Piece-ID Table Size .

[P ATTR] Specify Piece-ID attributes: View 1 of 4. F11=More ---> +---------------------------------+ OR +-----------+ Piece ID Weight Thickness Height Length Volume or per 100 per 100 of 1 of 1 per 100 *BLANKS (In pounds) (In inches) (In inches) (In inches) (In Cubic Inches) STDMLTR _6.250 10.00 04.125 09.500 F3=Exit F6=Update F11=More P ATTR options F17=Top F18=Bottom F24=Field Search F13=PA INF CARDS



7. Specify the Piece ID starting location and length in the appropriate fields. These fields are required.

8. Specify the Piece ID code. For example, this piece ID code could be STDMLTR, indicating USPS Marketing Mail machinable letters.

9. Define your mailpieces’ physical attributes:

a. Specify the Weight per 100 [Pieces] (In pounds). This field is required to determine the cost of the mailing.

b. Specify the Thickness per 100 [Pieces] (In inches). This field is required to calculate the volume of your total mailing.

c. Specify the Height of 1 [Mailpiece] (in inches). This field is required. Use one of the mailpieces that you measured in the previous step.

d. Specify the Length of 1 [Mailpiece] (in inches). This field is required. Use the mailpiece from the previous step.

e. (Optional) Specify the Volume per 100 [Mailpieces] (in cubic inches) field. This field accommodates 1-6 numeric or decimal characters.

f. Press F11 to view additional options.

g. Enter R (for Regular) in the Rate Type field.


i. Enter Y in the Auto-Compatible/Machinable Piece Ind field to indicate that your mailing is physically automation-compatible.

j. Press F11 to view the fourth/final view of this screen.

k. Enter Y in the Piece Attributes Default Indicator field if this is your default piece attribute definition.


You have completed your machinable presorted letters mailing definition.



Defining Presorted (Non-Automation) Flats

Remember these “rules” for defining presorted flats:

• The following example shows how to define the basic USPS Marketing Mail flats. You may use some of the optional parameter records to override defaults for this type of mailing.

• Both the Mailing Piece Attributes and Presort Definitions screens must be completed.

Defining Presorted Flats, Step-by-Step

QUICK TIPS: Use screen UPCPPD10 (in the Presort Definition component) to define the class of mail and mail category. Use screen UPCPPA11 (in the Mailing Piece Attributes component) to define the mailpiece attributes, rate type, and automation compatibility.




MailStream Plus modifies the display, changing the Mail Categories for the USPS Marketing Mail class.

3. Enter F in the Mail Category field, indicating that you are preparing flats.





[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 3 4 Mail Category. . . . . . . . . F F I L M P Presort Type . . . . . . . . . C R




b. Specify the Piece ID code. For example, this piece ID code could be STDFLT, indicating USPS Marketing Mail flats.














You have completed your presorted USPS Marketing Mail flats definition.

Defining Enhanced Carrier Route/Manual Letters

QUICK TIPS: Use screen UPCPPD10 (in the Presort Definition component) to define the class of mail and mail category. Use screen UPCPPA11 (in the Mailing Piece Attributes component) to define the mailpiece attributes, rate type, and automation compatibility.

Remember these “rules” for Enhanced Carrier Route/Manual letters:

• For non-automation compatible pieces, ensure that you enter N in the Auto-Compatible/Machinable Piece Ind field (View 3 of 4) of the Piece Attributes screen.

• Both the Mail Type and Piece Attributes information are required.

• To attempt the Enhanced Carrier Route/non-automation letters, you must put a Y in the Run Non-Automation Enhanced Carrier Presort? field.

Defining Enhanced Carrier Route Manual Letters, Step-by-Step






MailStream Plus modifies the display, changing the categories for USPS Marketing Mail.

3. Enter L in the Mail Category field, indicating that you are preparing letters.



6. Specify the physical mailpiece details.


b. Specify the Piece ID code. For example, this piece ID code could be STDCRM, indicating USPS Marketing Mail/carrier route.






h. Press F11 to view additional options. Note that the Piece ID or *BLANKS column does not scroll.




[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 3 4 Mail Category. . . . . . . . . L F I L M P Presort Type . . . . . . . . . C R









8. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, type 2 or 6 in front of Presort Definition to display the Presort Definition screen.

9. Page down to the ALG CR screen.

10. Enter a Q in the Carrier Optimization Option field. This option handles the anomaly where the Basic Enhanced carrier rate is more expensive than some of the automation letter rates. This option moves mail to the Automation portion of the presort if the resulting presort level rate is less expensive than Basic CRRT under the current USPS rates. If a job contains both for-profit and non-profit mailpieces, the presort is optimized as a for-profit mailing.

11. Enter L in the Carrier Walk Sequence of Input File field to indicate that our mailing is in Line-of-Travel (LOT) sequence.

12. Enter a Y in the Run USPS Marketing Mail Enhanced Carrier Presort? field so that MailStream Plus attempts the Enhanced Carrier Route qualification.

13. Leave the remaining fields on this screen blank.

14. Press F6 to save your definitions and exit the Presort Definition screen.

You have completed your enhanced carrier route/non-automation letters definition.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPPD00 UPCPPD30 Job MYJOB Presort Definition [ALG CR] Override default values for Presort, as required: Carrier Optimization Option . . . . . . . . . . . Q=Optimize, N=No (Dft=N) Carrier Walk Sequence of Input File . . . . . . . W, L, N, Z (Dft=Blank) Run USPS Marketing Mail Enhanced Carrier Presort? Y, N (Dft=Blank) Run Periodicals/Package Services Carrier Presort? Y, N (Dft=Blank) Attempt Auto-Enhanced Carrier Qualification?. . . Y, N (Dft=Blank) Attempt Barcoded Enhanced Carrier Qualification? Y, N (Dft=Y) Attempt Machinable Enhanced Carrier Qual? . . . . Y, N (Dft=Blank) Attempt Manual Enhanced Carrier Qualification?. . Y, N (Dft=Y) Qualify Walk Sequence Saturation Rate?. . . . . . Y, N (Dft=Y) Create Multi-Carrier Route Bundles? . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft=N)

More...

F3=Exit F6=Update


Package Services Example


“Package Services” mail used to be referred to as “Standard Mail B” and prior to that, “Fourth-Class” Mail.

This section contains an example for setting up a bound printed matter type Package Services mailing. When we discuss “standard” or “basic” jobs, we are referring to the screen definitions in chapters 3 through 9 of this guide.

Defining Bound Printed Matter Mailings

Use screen UPCPPD10 (in the Presort Definition component) to define the class of mail and mail category. Use screen UPCPPA11 (in the Mailing Piece Attributes component) to define the mailpiece attributes, rate type, and automation compatibility.Bound Printed Matter (BPM) refers to Package Services mail that:

• Weighs no more than 15 pounds.

• Is securely bound by permanent fastenings such as staples, spiral binding, glue, or stitching.

• Consists of advertising, promotional, directory, or editorial material (or any combination of such material).

Remember these “rules” for defining Package Services bound printed matter mailings:

• You must complete both the Mailing Piece Attributes and Presort Definitions screens.

• You must determine if a postage special rate applies to your mailing.

Defining Bound Printed Matter, Step-by-Step





Chapter 10: Job Setup ExamplesPackage Services Example

3. Enter 4 in the Class of Mail field to indicate Package Services Mail. Press ENTER.

MailStream Plus changes the displayed Mail Categories for the Package Services mail class.

4. Enter M in the Mail Category field, indicating that you are preparing machinable parcels.

5. Enter B in the Presort Type field to indicate bound printed matter.



8. Specify the physical piece details.


b. Specify the Piece ID code. This is the character string that you are using to define the mailing piece attributes. For example, this piece ID code could be BOUNDPM.





g. (optional) Specify the Volume per 100 [Mailpieces] (in cubic inches) field. This field accommodates 1-6 numeric or decimal characters.


i. Enter R (for Regular) in the Rate Type field.



[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . 4 1 2 3 4 Mail Category. . . . . . . . . M F I M Presort Type . . . . . . . . . B B S






9. Press F11 to view additional options.

10. Enter Y in the Piece Attributes Default Indicator field if this is your default piece attribute definition.



You have completed your Package Services bound printed matter definition.


Chapter 10: Job Setup ExamplesSCF Drop Shipment Examples

SCF Drop Shipment Examples

If you are doing SCF drop shipments, section L005 of the Domestic Mail Manual (“3-Digit ZIP Code Prefix Groups - SCF Sortation”) is particularly helpful.

Before you can define an SCF drop shipment, you must understand two important postal concepts.

• A drop shipment refers to a mailing that is moved by private transportation — using contract carriers or by the mailer — to a postal facility that is close to the destination for that mailing.

• An SCF (Sectional Center Facility) is a USPS facility that processes and distributes mail to post offices in a specific area (defined by 3-digit ZIP Code). SCFs can serve more than one 3-digit ZIP Code range.

Therefore, an SCF drop shipment is a mailing that is carried to and distributed from an SCF. This example shows you how to define such a mailing. We suggest that you use separate entry SCFs when:

• You calculate a savings in transporting your mailing to multiple SCFs.

• You want all recipients to receive your mailing on the same day.

Before you define your SCF/entry points, you must determine the cost of dropping your mail in one place close by, versus transporting your mail to different acceptance facilities. Here are a few things to consider when calculating your costs:

• Are you using a private contractor to haul your mail? How much does the contractor charge?

• What are the fuel costs, regardless of who hauls the mail?

• How much are you spending on tolls?

These are just some of the issues that would influence your costs. If you would save money by transporting your own mail, an SCF drop shipment may merit a closer look.

Remember these “rules” for defining SCF drop shipments:

Please refer to the DMM for a current list of SCFs.

• You may define a maximum number of SCF PT parameter records (one for each SCF) for a MailStream Plus job.

• You must determine if a postage special rate applies to your mailing.

Qualifying all SCFs as Entry Points, Step-by-Step

Use the Presort Definition component to define SCF drop shipments.

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, put a Enter 2 or 6 in front of Presort Definition.




3. Define the entry point code length.

If you are qualifying SCFs, you must define a length of 6 bytes in the Total length field.

4. When qualifying SCFs, there can be only a single entry point component, and it have a length of 6. Define the location of the element that comprises the entry point code in the Posn field under [E CODE] Define entry point components.

When using SCF PT (or ADC PT or NDC PT) please be aware that 6 bytes of data will be POSTED into the name/address records at the position specified, overwriting any data that may already be there.

5. Define the format of the element that makes up the entry point code as C for character.

6. Define the length of the element comprising the entry point code. When defining SCF codes, put a 6 in the Len (length) field.


[ML TYP] Specify class and type of mail to be processed: Class of Mail. . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 3 4 Mail Category. . . . . . . . . F F I L M P F16 Sort Options Presort Type . . . . . . . . . R C R




7. Press F19 to display a “blank” screen UPCPPD65.

If you are qualifying all SCFs, you define one SCF entry point code.

8. Press F10 to define your SCF entry points on screen UPCPPD67.

Tip: For the next few steps, refer to the Domestic Mailing Manual for a current list of SCFs and SCF ZIP Codes.

9. Fill in the 3-digit SCF entry point code.

10. Fill in the 5-digit SCF ZIP Code.

11. Fill in the Entry point constant to print on your tray tags and/or bag tags. We suggest that you enter a description that corresponds to the ZIP Code you specified in the previous step.

12. Set your processing flags.

a. Automatically qualify all SCFs? Specify Y, N, or leave blank for N. For this example we specify Y.

b. OK for DDU discount? Specify Y or N.

c. OK for SCF discount? Specify Y or N.

d. OK for NDC discount? Specify Y, N, or X (special).

e. OK for in-county discount? Specify Y, N, or X.

f. Use Default SCF PT for Matching SCF ZIP Codes? Specify Y or N.


[SCF PT] Specify SCF entry point codes:

C=Chg Auto D=Dlt SCF ZIP Constant Qualify Flags Dft

Bottom F6=Accept EPs F10=Add EPs F12=Cancel F13=Delete all F17=Top F18=Bottom F19=Sort by SCF F20=Sort by Constant



13. EP facility type: Specify one of the following:

a. Make 3-digit scheme containers? Specify Y or N.

b. Default Indicator? Specify Y or N.

c. OK for ADC discount? Specify Y or N.

d. Make no-min 5-dig/scheme containers for DDU entry USPS Marketing Mail parcels? Specify Y or N.

14. Press F6 to accept your definition.


A ASF

B NDC (formerly BMC)

C Origin SCF

D DDU

E Origin DDU

H Transfer Hub

J Origin ADC

K Origin NDC

L Origin ASF

N Non-determined

O Origin (also DMU)

Q Origin AMF

R ADC

S SCF



15. If you have no further SCF PTs to add, press F3 to return to the first screen, where all your defined SCF PTs are displayed.

16. Press F6 to accept the displayed definitions. Press F6 again to save the Presort definition and return to the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen.


[SCF PT] Specify SCF entry point codes:

C=Chg Auto D=Dlt SCF ZIP Constant Qualify Flags Dft 207 20744 LANHAM MARYLAND Y N NNNYYSYN Y

Bottom F6=Accept EPs F10=Add EPs F12=Cancel F13=Delete all F17=Top F18=Bottom F19=Sort by SCF F20=Sort by Constant



Other SCF Drop Shipment Examples

Now that you know how to define a basic SCF drop shipment, here are some additional examples for using the SCF PT parameter record to create other shipments.

Example 1: Qualify all SCFs with no default

For this type of SCF drop shipment:

• You cannot specify a Y in the Attempt DDU Discount? field.

• MailStream Plus ignores the Default SCF Point field.

• All ZIP Codes must be within the SCF.

Example 2: Qualify all SCFs with a DMM L005 default

Locate the SCF code in section L005 of the Domestic Mail Manual.

• If you specify a ZIP Code, it must apply to the default.

• If you specify an Entry Point Constant, it must apply to the default.

• Any attempts to qualify for a DDU discount applies to the specified ZIP Code.

Example 3: Qualify all SCFs with a non-DMM L005 default

For this type of SCF drop shipment:

• The SCF ZIP Code is required.

• DDU discount attempts apply only to the default ZIP Code.

• The Entry Point Constant field applies to the specified ZIP Code.

• MailStream Plus ignores the Default SCF Point field, and uses the value defined on the default from the entry point definition screen.


Chapter 10: Job Setup ExamplesUsing the DRPKEY Report Information (RP INF) Subkeyword

Using the DRPKEY Report Information (RP INF) Subkeyword

The DRPKEY report information subkeyword helps MailStream to:

• Apply appropriate DDU discounts to a mailing

• Determine the locale code posted to the Mail.dat *.csm file

• Create no-minimum 5-digit/scheme containers for DDU entry USPS Marketing Mail parcel sacks (defined using position 65 of each xxx PT parameter record)

Use the DRPKEY subkeyword with the RP INF parameter record if your mailing contains only one xxx PT parameter record definition. Use the DRPKEY subkeyword with the EP INF parameter record if your mailing contains multiple entry points.

Determine the USPS Facility Drop Site Key

For any job, MailStream Plus attempts to determine a facility based on the information in your job parameters. DRPKEY is optional, but if you define your job using a DRPKEY that applies to the entry point, MailStream Plus uses the supplied data in preference to attempting to look up the appropriate entry facility for the container.

You must obtain the USPS Facility Drop Site Key from the USPS. To do this, you must know the entry facility location. For this example, we want to obtain DDU discounts for entering the mail at the Prescott Valley, AZ DDU.

Accessing the USPS FAST Web Site

1. Go to the USPS Facility Access and Shipment Tracking (FAST) Web site.

2. Click Facility Access and Shipment Tracking (FAST) at the top right corner of the screen.

All information and examples from the USPS FAST Web site are Copyright © 1999-2005 by the USPS. All Rights Reserved.

3. On the next screen click the Go button next to the Resources selection.


https://fast.usps.com/fast/main/viewLandingPage.action


The USPS edits this information regularly, so you may have to verify it occasionally.

4. Click the Go button next to the Drop-Ship Product File Download.

Obtaining the Length and Position of the Drop Site Key

1. On the same screen, click the Download button next to the All Files option.

2. Follow the prompts to download file All.zip to your local PC.

3. Extract (unzip) file Layout from the All.zip file to your local drive. To do this:

a. Locate file All.zip on your local drive.

b. Right-click on file All.zip. Select “Open with WinZip” from the menu. WinZip displays the files in All.zip.

c. Select file Layout from the list.

d. Select Extract from the next menu.

e. Select the local drive and folder where WinZip will extract the file.

4. Select and open file Layout in Windows Notepad, or in your preferred text editor, and locate the following heading:



DROP SHIP ADDRESS PRODUCT - DETAIL RECORD

5. Locate the Drop Site Key item in that section:

This line shows the Address file value you must place in the subkeyword definition for DRPKEY.

6. Make a note of the Drop Site Key values shown. In the above example:

• Length = 9

• Start position = 02

• End position = 10

Finding Your DDU Drop Site Key:

1. Select file Address, and extract that file to your local drive. To do this:

a. Locate file All.zip on your local drive.

b. Right-click on file All.zip. Select “Open with WinZip” from the menu. WinZip displays the files in All.zip.

c. Select file Address from the list.

d. Select Extract from the next menu.

e. Select the local drive and folder where WinZip will extract the file.



2. Open this file in Windows Notepad or in the text editor of your choice.

ADDRESS is the file you search to find the address of the facility you want to use for your entry point. For this example, we are searching for the Prescott Valley, AZ DDU.

3. Using your text editor’s search function, specify and locate the city name.

We have highlighted our DDU information below:

4. Locate the 9-digit drop site key in positions 2 through 10 for a length of 9. (This is the layout we identified in the previous section.) Our drop site key is circled above.

As the text at the bottom of the previous screen shot says, the drop site key field length is defined as 9 bytes. Keys are only 7 bytes of data, with two trailing spaces.

5. Note this key so that you can specify it on the RP INF, EP INF, or BATINF parameter as shown in this example:

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....8

RP INF DRPKEY BZ10769

The full 9-byte USPS facility codes are subject to change. Our example drop site key, BZ10769, may change with different USPS address file releases.



6. Define your XXX PT parameter records, as shown below, specifying a Y in position 59 to attempt to qualify for DDU discounts.

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....8

xxx PT 1 87312 PRESCOTT VALLEY ARIZONA DDU Y Y

When the DRPKEY subkeyword is used, the ZIP Code value in position 22 of the ENT PT parameter is ignored when applying DDU discounts.


Using MAIL360™ to Number Intelligent Mail Barcodes


MailStream Plus interfaces with the MAIL360 numbering engine, allowing you to automatically number and generate a 31-digit mailpiece barcode. For more information on the Intelligent Mail barcode, review the IMBOUT parameter record description in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.

You can generate Intelligent Mail® barcodes using MailStream Plus alone. However, you must purchase and install MAIL360™ to automatically number Intelligent Mail® Barcodes.

The Intelligent Mail® barcode consists of four different types of bars - ascending, descending, full,

and tracker bars. The Intelligent Mail® barcode is an efficient way to represent the information that

directs mailpieces through the mail stream. Intelligent Mail® barcodes are generated for pallets, bags, trays, and for individual mailpieces.

The data payload (output) of an Intelligent Mail® barcode is a fixed-length array of up to 31 base-10 (decimal) digits that are converted into a series of 65 bars to represent mailing details. The 65-character encoded number is referred to as the “TADF,” with each letter representing a specific bar as follows:

• T (Tracker) - A short bar that is vertically centered in the barcode

• A (Ascender) - A bar that fills the upper two-thirds of the barcode

• D (Descender) - A bar that fills the lower two-thirds of the barcode

• F (Full bar) - A bar that takes up the full height of the barcode

The format of the Intelligent Mail® barcode TADF format is:


Chapter 10: Job Setup ExamplesUsing MAIL360™ to Number Intelligent Mail Barcodes

MAIL360/Intelligent Mail Barcode Parameter Records

This Screen...Defines this Parameter... For this Processing...

UPCPM310 IMBCTL Defines how Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers are created/assigned and defines the handling of numbering assignment errors

UPCPM312 ML 360 Defines configuration values for MAIL360

UPCPM314

UPCPM315

SRVFRQ Defines readable, numeric representation of the Intelligent Mail barcodes; Defines when to use the alternative Service Type ID as part of the Intelligent Mail barcode (optional); Defines both inbound and outbound Intelligent Mail barcodes

UPCPM316 IP IMB Sets Web address and port when using the remote Web service numbering

UPCPM320 CACERT Defines Certificate Authority file path or DD name

(none) Defines DS file name, library name, and member name

UPCPM340 IMBINB Defines inbound mailpiece Intelligent Mail barcode posting

UPCPM342 ZIPINB Defines inbound Intelligent Mail barcode ZIP Code formats and processing

UPCPM343 SFIMPB Defines the input location of a 34-byte IM® package barcode and defines IM® package barcode fees for use with letters and flats.

UPCPM344 E KEY Defines enterprise keys; cannot be in packed data format

UPCPM346 UDATAI Defines user-defined data fields

UPCPM360 IMBOUT Defines outbound mailpiece Intelligent Mail barcode posting

UPCPM361 FRMNAM Defines firm name from the input file for the outbound Intelligent Mail barcode

PERNAM Defines parsed personal name in your input file for the outbound Intelligent Mail barcode

ADDRES Defines the parsed input address elements for the MAIL360 Data Manager mailpiece file

UPCPM363 PRDDTA Defines the output location and length of the item being mailed; defines the location and length of the output COD amount due the sender (mailer)

RECPNT Defines the output location and length of the recipient’s e-mail address, SMS address and phone number, and customer reference number

UPCPM366 IMBPLT

IMBCNT

Defines pallet-level Intelligent Mail barcode

Defines Tray/Bag level Intelligent Mail barcode

UPCPM380 UDATAS Specify User Defined Data for the Mail Piece Set



Defining MAIL360 Intelligent Mail Barcode Processing

Follow these instructions for defining MAIL360 processing.

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, enter 2 or 6 in the entry field next to the M3 function.

• Option 2 allows you to edit an existing job and to add MAIL360 processing to that job.

• Option 6 allows you to copy existing MAIL360 processing information from another job or external file.

2. Press Enter.

UPCPM390 SRVFEE Specify a service fee for each extra service code

UPCPSR11 IMBSER (press F13 from any UPCPM3nn screen) Defines the starting serial number for that ID; allows you to define up to 250 starting serial number/ID pairs

This Screen...Defines this Parameter... For this Processing...

14:25:26 MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPDS00 UPCPDS01 Job @IVP@ Define and/or Submit a Presort Job


PX Defaults for Print Output 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D PA Mailing Piece Attributes 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D ST Name/Address File Layout 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D PD Presort Definition 03/31/YYYY 17:23:53 PLAT00D NA Name/Address Record Posting 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D M3 MAIL360 03/31/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D RI Information for USPS Reports 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D RR Report Selection 03/31/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D SB Submit Batch Job 03/31/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D F3=Exit F12=PrevScrn F20=View Parm File F23=Card Edit



3. Page Down to the ML 360 screen.

Screen UPCPM312 defines the configuration options for MAIL360. MAIL360 provides Intelligent Mail barcode assignment and management capabilities.

4. Use screen UPCPM312 to define processing details.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM312 Job MYJOB MAIL360 Parameters [ML 360] Specify MAIL360 Control Parameter. Numbering Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L, R Mailer ID Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A, E (Dft: A) Serial Number Format for IMpB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L, S L=Long, S=Short

Partition ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

More... ___________________________________________________________________________ F6=Save F12=Cancel


Numbering Engine Specify the numbering engine to use:

L Use the local numbering engine (MAIL360 Manager).

R Use the remote numbering engine (MAIL360 Connector add-on).

Mailer ID Policy Specify the process to use for adding mailer IDs. Applies only if you specify L in the Numbering Engine field above.

A Add the Mailer ID.

E Return an error when the Mailer ID does not exist.

blank Default is A.

Serial Number Format for IMpB

S Use the short Intelligent Mail® Package barcode serial number format (7 or 10 digits long).

L Use the Long Intelligent Mail® Package barcode serial number format (11 or 14 digits long).

Partition ID Specify the partition ID. When using the local numbering engine (MAIL360 Manager), the length of this field is 2. Enter a value in the range 00-99 or leave blank.

When using the remote numbering engine (MAIL360 Client Connector), the length of this field is 20. Enter any string or leave blank.

blank Default - no partitioning used.



5. Page Down to the SRVFRQ screen.

This screen allows you to define outbound Intelligent Mail barcode details:

6. Define your processing details:

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM314 Job MYJOB MAIL360 Parameters [SRVFRQ] Specify IMB Frequency of Posting:

Specify Values for OUTBOUND IMB Numbers

Alternate Non-Automation Service Type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternate Full-Service/Basic Service Type ID . . . . . . . . . .

Posting Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F, L, U, N F=First, L=Last, U=User Def Char, N=Every Nth Rec

Nth record extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of User Defined Character . . . . . . . . . . . . User Defined Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First/Last Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B, P B=Bag or Tray, P=Bundle

More... ________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F6=Update F13=IMBSER


Alternate Service Type ID

Define the three-digit alternate service type ID code for inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers.

NOTE: The USPS adds and changes new codes regularly, so please check your current USPS documentation for a list of valid codes.

Posting Frequency [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers]

Enter the posting frequency option for outbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers:

F First record (see First/Last Extension [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers])

L Last record (see First/Last Extension [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers])

U User-defined character in name/address record (see Location of User-Defined Character [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] and User Defined Character)

N Every Nth record (see Nth Record Extension [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers])

blank Do not use an alternate Service Type ID for outbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers.

Nth Record Extension [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers]

Enter the nth record extension for the outbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers. If the Posting Frequency [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] field contains N, this field must contain a value from 2 to 99999.



7. Page down to complete your SRVFRQ definition for Inbound Intelligent Mail barcodes:

Location of User-Defined Character [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers]

Enter the input position of the user-defined character that triggers the use of the alternate Service Type ID for outbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers. Must not be blank when you specify U for the Posting Frequency [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] field. If you specify a value for this field, you must also specify a value in the User Defined Character field to define the trigger character in your input file.

User Defined Character

Specify the unique character in your input file that triggers the use of the alternate Service Type ID for outbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers. This field must contain a value when the Posting Frequency [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] field contains U. If you specify a value for this field, you must also define a value in the Location of User-Defined Character [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] field to define the location of the trigger character in your input file.

First/Last Extension [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers]

If the Posting Frequency [for Outbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] field contains F or L, this field must contain one of the following extension codes:

B Bag or Tray

P Bundle



Non-Automation Service Type ID

Specify the three-digit Non-Automation Service Type ID for Intelligent Mail® barcode/Service Type ID for IM® package Barcode or Location of Service Type ID in record.

NOTE: The USPS adds and changes new codes regularly, so please check your current USPS documentation for a list of valid codes. MailStream Plus does not validate the Service Type ID you enter.

Full-Service/Basic Service Type ID

Specify the three-digit alternate Service Type ID for automation mail being assigned either Full-Service or Basic Intelligent Mail barcode numbers. If these columns are blank, the Service Type ID defaults to the alternate Service Type ID used for the Alternate Non-Automation Service Type ID. This field cannot be blank if you specify “F” or “Y” in the Intelligent Mail Mode field of the ALG PP parameter record.

NOTE: The USPS adds and changes new codes regularly, so please check your current USPS documentation for a list of valid codes. MailStream Plus does not validate the Service Type ID you enter.

Posting Frequency [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers]

Enter the posting frequency option for inbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers:

F First record (see First/Last Extension [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers])

L Last record (see First/Last Extension [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers])

U User-defined character in name/address record (see the First/Last Extension [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] and User Defined Character)

N Every Nth record (see Nth Record Extension [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers])

blank Do not use an alternate Service Type ID for outbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers.



8. Page down to define Web address and port details in the IP IMB screen.

The IMP IMB screen identifies the MAIL360 Intelligent Mail barcode Web Service IP address for MAIL360 Manager/Connector.

Nth Record Extension [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers]

Enter the nth record extension for the inbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers. If the Posting Frequency [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] field contains N, this field must contain a value from 2 to 99999.

Location of User-Defined Character [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers]

Enter the input position of the user-defined character that triggers the use of the alternate Service Type ID for inbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers. Must not be blank when you specify U for the Posting Frequency [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] field. If you specify a value for this field, you must also specify a value in the User Defined Character field to define the trigger character in your input file.

User Defined Character

Specify the unique character in your input file that triggers the use of the alternate Service Type ID for inbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers. This field must contain a value when the Posting Frequency [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] field contains U. If you specify a value for this field, you must also define a value in the Location of User-Defined Character [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] field to define the location of the trigger character in your input file.

First/Last Extension [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers]

If the Posting Frequency [for Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Numbers] field contains F or L, this field must contain one of the following extension codes:

B Bag or Tray

P Bundle


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM316 Job MYJOB Name/Address Record Posting [IP IMB] Specify Web Services information for IMB parameter. IMB Web Service Domain name or Address:

IMB Web Service Port Number:




9. Define processing details:

10. Page down to the CACERT screen.

11. Fill in the processing details:


Intelligent Mail Barcode Web Service Domain name or Address

Enter the Intelligent Mail barcode Web Service domain name or address.

Intelligent Mail Barcode Web Service Port Number

Enter the Intelligent Mail barcode Web Service port number.

NOTE: The port number must be right-justified with leading spaces or leading zeroes.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM320 Job MYJOB Name/Address Record Posting Specify DS Filename: DS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Member. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

[CACERT] Specify path to Security Certificate:



DS File Define the name of the MAIL360 Dataset (DS) file.

Library Define the Library for the DS file.

Member Define the Member for the DS file.

[CACERT] Specify path to Security Certificates

Define the Certificate Authority file path or DD name, with a maximum of 73 bytes.



12. Page down to the IMBINB screen.

Screen UPCPM340 generates the barcode that applies to a specific mailpiece rather than a tray, sack, or pallet. The format of the mailpiece barcode is specific, and differs from the tray, sack, and pallet barcodes. It is a 65-bar barcode, known as the TADF Payload, accommodating 31 digits of data.


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM340Job MYJOB Name/Address Record Posting [IMBINB] Specify Inbound PIECE IMB posting: Pos Len Position on NA Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-assigned IMB Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P=Input from NA record, Blank=Output Location of Mailer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R=In the record, I=INF parameters, S=Same as outbound Location of Mailer ID if in record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of Default Service type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R=In the record, C=From this card Location of Default Service type if in record. . . . . . . . . . Default Service type for 11-digit ZIP IMBs. . . . . . . . . . . . Serial number assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A, B, M, R Serial number to use for all 6-digit mailer IDs . . . . . . . Serial number to use for all 9-digit mailer IDs . . . . . . . . Location of serial number in input record . . . . . . . . . . . . Location on NA record to post TADF Payload. . . . . . . . . . . . More... ___________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F6=Update F13=IMBSER


Position on NA Record

Specify the location of the inbound Intelligent Mail barcode piece (31 characters) in the name /address record (length can be 3 or 4 digits).

Preassigned Intelligent Mail Barcode Indicator

Code indicating the pre assigned Intelligent Mail barcode indicator:

P The location specified in the Position on NA Record field (above) is the location of a pre-defined Intelligent Mail barcode number. If you select “P”, the following fields must be blank:

Location of Mailer ID

Location of Mailer ID if in record

Location of Default Service Type ID

Location of Default Service Type ID if in record

Default Service Type ID for 11-digit ZIP Intelligent Mail barcodes

Serial number assignment

Serial number to use for all 6-digit mailer IDs

Serial number to use for all 9-digit mailer IDs

blank The location specified in the Position on NA Record field is the location for the generated Intelligent Mail barcode number.



Location of Mailer ID Specify a code indicating the location of the Mailer ID:

R The Mailer ID is in the name/address record. If you specify “R”, then the Position on NA Record field must be blank and the Length of Mailer ID If in Record field must not be blank.

I The Mailer ID is defined in the INF parameters.

S The Mailer ID is the same as the outbound.

Location of Mailer ID if in record

Specify the location of the Mailer ID in the name and address record.

NOTE: This field must not be blank if you specify “R” in the Location of Mailer ID field.

Location of Default Service type

Required. Specify the location of the default Service Type ID:

R In the input record in the location specified in the Location of Default Service Type ID if in Record field.

C Specified in the Location of Default Service type field.

NOTE: This field must not be blank.

Location of Default Service Type ID if in Record

Specify the location of the default Service Type ID in the input record (3- or 4-digit length).

NOTE: This field must not be blank if you specify “R” in the Location of Default Service type field.

Default Service Type ID for 11-digit ZIP Intelligent Mail barcodes

Specify the default Service Type ID.

NOTE: This field must not be blank if you specify “R” in the Location of Default Service type field.

Length of Mailer ID If in Record

Specify the length of the Mailer ID if it resides in the input record:

6 6-digit Mailer ID

9 9-digit Mailer ID

blank Defaults to the 9-digit mailer ID.

NOTE: This field must not be blank if you specify “R” in the Location of Mailer ID field. When you specify 9 in this field, MailStream Plus accepts either a 6- or 9-digit mailer ID. If you specify 9 and a 6-digit mailer ID is found in the record, the mailer ID is formatted with three trailing spaces. All 9-digit mailer IDs start with a “9.”




14. Page Down to the ZIPINB screen.

Serial Number assignment

Specify the process to use for assigning serial numbers:

A Automatically assign serial numbers.

NOTE: MAIL360 determines how many records are in the file and reserves the difference from what it requires to store serial numbers. Numbering starts with the next available value, based on the last call to MAIL360.

B Basic serial number assignment based on the serial number entered in both the Serial Number to use for all 6-Digit Mailer IDs and Serial Number to use for all 9-Digit Mailer IDs fields. BOTH of these fields must be populated.

M Manually assign serial numbers.

R Assign serial numbers from the input record.

S Assign the same serial numbers used for the outbound Intelligent Mail barcodes. “S” is only valid when you assign both inbound and outbound Intelligent Mail barcodes. Also, you must specify “S” in the Location of Mailer ID field.

NOTE: Using MailStream’s manual numbering engine does not guarantee any uniqueness period required by the USPS for full service discounts. You must keep track of the last serial number used and update accordingly.

Serial Number to use for all 6-Digit Mailer IDs

Specify the serial number to use for all 6-digit Mailer IDs.

Serial Number to use for all 9-Digit Mailer IDs

Specify the serial number to use for all 9-digit Mailer IDs.

Location of Serial Number in input record

Specify the three-digit location of the serial number in the input record.

Location on NA record to post TADF Payload

Specify the input name/address record location in which to post the 65-character TADF Payload.

This field allows your 31-digit Intelligent Mail barcode to be converted to the 65-character TADF “payload,” which maps each of the 65 characters to an Intelligent Mail barcode font on the Inkjet printer.

Contact your inkjet printer manufacturer for specific instructions on printing Intelligent Mail barcode fonts.




Screen UPCPM342 defines the inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode ZIP Code details for MAIL360 processing.


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPNA00 UPCPM342 Job MYJOB Name/Address Record Posting [ZIPINB] Specify Inbound IMB ZIP Code Parameters:

Location of Inbound ZIP Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inbound ZIP Code Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C=Character, P=3/5-Byte Packed, F=Floating B=3-Byte Binary, 9=9-Digit ZIP in 4-Byte Binary Location of Inbound ZIP+4 Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inbound ZIP+4 Add-On Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C=Character, P=3-Byte Packed, B=2-Byte Binary Location of Inbound Delivery Point Code 2-Digit Add-On . . . . . . . . . Inbound DPC Add-On Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C=Character, P=2-Byte Packed, B=1-Byte Binary --- OR --- Inbound ZIP to be used for all records . . . . . . . . . . . . . More... ___________________________________________________________________ ______ F6=Save F12=Cancel


Location of Inbound ZIP Code

Specify the location of the Inbound ZIP Code in the name/address record.

Inbound ZIP Code Type

Code indicating the inbound ZIP Code type:

C ZIP Code is in display (character) format (5 bytes).

P ZIP Code is in packed format in a 3-byte field or, optionally, a 5-byte field with the ZIP + 4 Code.

F ZIP Code (5- or 9-digit) is the final element in a “floating” field. The right most position is specified by column 8-12. The floating ZIP Code may also optionally contain a dash between the ZIP Code and the ZIP + 4 Code.

B ZIP Code is a 3-byte binary number. If the ZIP Code is in a 4-byte binary number, just specify the second byte of the field.

9 9-digit ZIP Code is in a 4-byte binary field.

Location of Inbound ZIP + 4 Add-On

Contains the location of the inbound ZIP + 4 add-on. May contain the location of the ZIP+4 add-on code in the input name and address record. Must be blank if the ZIP Code type defined in the Inbound ZIP Code Type field is “9”, This field is optional if the ZIP Code type defined in the Inbound ZIP Code Type field is “F”.

Inbound ZIP + 4 Add-On Type

Code indicating the inbound ZIP + 4 add-on type:

C ZIP + 4 is in a display (character) format (4-bytes)

P ZIP + 4 is in a packed format in a 3-byte field

B ZIP + 4 is in a binary format in a 2-byte field



16. Page down to the E KEY screen.

This screen defines the Enterprise Key/E KEY parameter record. Examples of enterprise data include customer information (for example, customer name and address, customer account number, etc.) and any enterprise keys. The Enterprise Key fields are indexed fields in the MAIL360 Data Manager and should be unique if used as selection criteria.

Screen UPCPM344 is only required if you are creating and using the Mailpiece file for MAIL360 Data Manager processing. Enterprise keys cannot be in packed data format.

Location of Inbound Delivery Point Code 2-digit Add-On

Contains the location of the inbound Delivery Point Code 2-digit add-on. If the Location of Inbound ZIP + 4 Add-On and Inbound ZIP + 4 Add-On Type fields are blank, this field must also be blank.

Inbound DPC Add-On Type

Code indicating the inbound Delivery Point Code (DPC) add-on type:

C DPC is in a display (character) format (2-bytes)

P DPC is in a packed format in a 2-byte field

B DPC is in a binary format in a 1-byte field

Inbound ZIP [Code] to be used for all records

Contains an inbound ZIP Code to use for all records. If this field contains a value, all other fields on this screen must be blank. When using this position, the inbound ZIP Code must be 5 or 11 bytes long. Nine bytes is not acceptable.


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM344 Job MYJOB MAIL360 Parameters [E KEY] Specify values for Enterprise Keys, if desired:

Enter the position and length of the following in the Input Record Pos Len Enterprise Key 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enterprise Key 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enterprise Key 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




17. Define optional Enterprise Keys as follows:

18. Page Down to the UDATAI screen.

This screen allows you to identify the location of user-defined data in the input record for inbound mailpieces. The user-defined fields are not indexed. You can use these fields to store descriptive information such as a department name.

Screen UPCPM346 is required only if you are creating and using the Mailpiece file for MAIL360 Data Manager processing.


Enterprise Key 1 Enter the location and length of Enterprise Key 1 in the name/address records; maximum length allowed is 64.



MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM346 Job MYJOB MAIL360 Parameters [UDATAI] Specify values for User Defined Data on Inbound Records:

Enter the position and length of the User Defined Data Fields Pos Len Field 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




1. Define optional user-defined data fields as follows:

2. Page down to the PRDDTA/RECPNT screen.

3. Specify positions and lengths to read data from the input name/address file:


Field 1 Enter the location and length of user-defined field 1 in the name/address records; maximum length allowed is 64.



MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM363 Job MYJOB MAIL360 Parameters

Specify position and length for output to the name/address file:

[PRDDTA] Pos Len Value of Article. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COD Amount Due Sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

[RECPNT] Pos Len E-Mail Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SMS Address/Phone Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Reference Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Value of Article Defines the input location and length of the value of the article being mailed

COD Amount Due Sender Defines the input location and length of the COD Due Sender amount

E-Mail Address Defines the input location and length of the recipient's e-mail address

SMS Address/Phone Number

Defines the input location and length of the SMS address/phone number (phone number at which recipient receives text messages)

Customer Reference Number

Defines the input location and length of the customer reference number



4. Page down to the IMBPLT/IMBCNT screen.

5. Define your pallet- and tray/tag-level barcode information as follows:

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM366 Job MYJOB MAIL360 Parameters [IMBPLT] Pallet IMB Barcode: Mailer ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mailer ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 6 (Dft: 9) Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft: Y) [IMBCNT] Tray/Bag IMB Barcode: Mailer ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mailer ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 6 (Dft: 9) Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft: Y)



IMBPLT - Pallet Intelligent Mail barcode

Mailer ID Use this field (required) to specify the 6- or 9-digit USPS Mailer ID. There is no default value.

Use the Mailer ID Format field to indicate the correct format of this ID. If you define a 6-digit Mailer ID, ensure that you left-justify that value within this field.

Mailer ID Format Specify the format of the USPS-assigned Mailer ID (a 6-digit or 9-digit Mailer ID). This definition also changes the format of the 24-digit barcode.

6 6-digit Mailer ID

9 9-digit Mailer ID

blank Defaults to the 9-digit Mailer ID.



Serial Number Defines the starting serial number of the 21-digit Pallet Intelligent Mail barcode number. This number increments serially so that each pallet is assigned a unique serial number.

Please note these suggestions for this field:

• This field should usually be left blank, using the number from the customer information file. You may specify a value to re-run a job or to reset the customer information file.

• If the Mailer ID Format is 9, this number should not be greater than 9 digits. If the format is 6, this number may be a maximum of 12 digits. The possible values are:

• A user-specified value: The beginning serial number. Ensure that no other jobs with IMBPLT are running when this is selected. If you define a value for this field, you must ensure that the value does not overlap with the values for other jobs.

If you define this field, and if the Save the Serial Number? field is set to “Y,” MailStream Plus makes no attempt to keep the serial numbers unique by sharing the MSETCI file serial numbers with other currently running jobs. The ending serial number from this job is saved regardless of whether other jobs are using the MSETCI file.

• blank or zero (default): Use the serial number from the customer information file.

Save the Serial Number?

Specify whether to save the last serial number to the customer information file.

Y Yes, save the last serial number (default).

N No, do not save the last serial number and leave the customer information file as-is. This is useful for re-running jobs.

blank Defaults to Y.

IMBCNT - Container [Tray/Tag] Intelligent Mail barcode

Mailer ID Use this field (required) to specify the 6- or 9-digit USPS Mailer ID. There is no default value.

Use the Mailer ID Format field to indicate the correct format of this ID. If you define a 6-digit Mailer ID, ensure that you left-justify that value within this field.

Mailer ID Format Specify the format of the USPS-assigned Mailer ID (a 6-digit or 9-digit Mailer ID). This definition also changes the format of the 24-digit barcode.

6 6-digit Mailer ID

9 9-digit Mailer ID

blank Defaults to the 9-digit Mailer ID.




6. Page down to the UDATAS screen.

Serial Number Defines the starting serial number of the 24-digit tray/bag Intelligent Mail barcode. This number increments serially so that each tray or sack is assigned a unique serial number. Please note these suggestions for this field:

• This field should usually be left blank, using the number from the customer information file. You may specify a value to re-run a job or to reset the customer information file.

• If the format in column 18 of this parameter record is 9, this number should not be greater than 5 digits. If the format is 6, this number may be a maximum of 8 digits.

The possible values are:

• A user-specified value: The beginning serial number. Ensure that no other jobs with IMBCNT running when this is selected. If you define a value for this field, you must ensure that the value does not overlap with the values for other jobs.

If you define this field, and if the Save the Serial Number? field is set to “Y,” MailStream Plus makes no attempt to keep the serial numbers unique by sharing the MSETCI file serial numbers with other currently running jobs. The ending serial number from this job is saved regardless of whether other jobs are using the MSETCI file.

• blank or zero (default): Use the serial number from the customer information file.

Save the Serial Number?

Specify whether to save the last serial number to the customer information file.

Y Yes, save the last serial number (default).

N No, do not save the last serial number and leave the customer information file as-is. This is useful for re-running jobs.

blank Defaults to Y.


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM380 Job MYJOB MAIL360 Parameters [UDATAS] Specify User Defined Data for the Mailpiece Set:

Enter the position and length for the User Defined Data Fields Pos Len Field 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bottom ________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F6=Update F13=IMBSER



7. Define your mailpiece set data as follows:

8. Page down to the SRVFEE screen.

9. Define your service codes and associated fees. The service codes are three digits, 000-999, with blank spaces as the default. The fees are specified with two decimal places (example: 1234.56),

with all zeroes as the default.

10. Press F13 to display screen UPCPSR11.

Screen UPCPSR11 allows you to manually serial number your mailing IDs.


Field 1 • Specify the location of User-Defined Field 1 in the input record.

• Specify the length of User-Defined Field 1 in the input record. The maximum length allowed is 64.





MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM390 Job MYJOB MAIL360 Parameters [SRVFEE] Specify values for SRVFEE, if desired: Fee Code In Cents Extra Service Code/Fee 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F6=Update F13=IMBSER


Extra Service Code/Fee 1 through 5

Define service codes and their associated service fees, up to five definitions



11. Define Intelligent Mail serial numbering using screen UPCPSR11. You may define a maximum of 250 serial numbers.

12. Press F6 to save your definition and return to the previous screen.

13. Press F6 again to save your MAIL360 settings and return to the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen


Mailer ID Enter the Mailer ID, left justified. Must be 6 or 9 digits long.

NOTE: All 9-digit Mailer IDs start with a “9.”

Starting Serial Number Enter the starting serial number for the Mailer ID, right justified. The starting serial number must be 6 or 9 digits long. If 6 digits long, the starting serial number must include leading spaces or zeroes.

NOTE: If the Mailer ID is 6 digits long, the starting serial number must be 9 digits long. If the Mailer ID is 9 digits long, the starting serial number must be 6 digits long.

Serial Number Size for IMpB Define the serial number size indicator for Intelligent Mail Package barcode. There is no default value.

S Use the short Intelligent Mail Package barcode serial number format (7 or 10 digits long)

L Use the Long Intelligent Mail Package barcode serial number format (11 or 14 digits long)

Starting IMpB Serial Number Define the starting Intelligent Mail Package barcode serial number for mailer ID, right justified. Must be 7, 10, 11, or 14 digits long. If 7, 10, or 11 digits long, include leading spaces or zeroes.

NOTE: If the Mailer ID is 6 digits long, the starting serial number must be 10 or 14 digits long based on the IMpB serial number size selected. If the Mailer ID is 9 digits long, the starting serial number must be 7 or 11 digits long based on the IMpB serial number size selected.



Example: IM® Barcoding, USPS Marketing Mail Letter Presorts

This section provides an example of defining a USPS Marketing Mail letter presort.

1. Define/Submit screen, type 2 next to M3 to select MAIL360.

2. You will see screen UPCM310, the initial MAIL360 Parameters screen.

Screen UPCPM310 is the first in a series of screens used to define the Intelligent Mail barcode format and content. Screen UPCPM310 defines a general control flag and defines how Intelligent Mail Barcode numbers are created and assigned.

3. Use screens UPCPM310 and UPCPM311 to define IMBCTL processing details. You must page down from screen UPCPM310 to define the options on screen UPCPM311.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPDS00 UPCPDS01 Job MYJOB Define and/or Submit a Presort Job


PX Defaults for Print Output 03/30/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D PA Mailing Piece Attributes 03/30/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D ST Name/Address File Layout 03/30/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D PD Presort Definition 03/30/YYYY 17:23:53 PLAT00D NA Name/Address Record Posting 03/30/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D M3 2 MAIL360 RI Information for USPS Reports 03/30/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D RR Report Selection 03/30/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D

SB Submit Batch Job


In this field... Specify...

UPCPM310 Screens:

Outbound/Inbound Assignment Option

O – Assign only outbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers

Location of Intelligent Mail Barcode Assignment Type in input file

We are leaving this field blank for this example; defines the location of the Intelligent Mail Barcode assignment type in the input record

User-Defined Value for Outbound Only

We are leaving this field blank for this example; defines the value for outbound only Intelligent Mail barcode numbers

User-Defined Value Inbound Only

We are leaving this field blank for this example.



User-Defined Value for Both [Outbound/ Inbound]

We are leaving this field blank for this example; defines the value for both outbound and inbound Intelligent Mail barcode numbers

Define error handling for Invalid IMB/IMpB numbers


Define MAIL360 error handling during MailStream Plus processing

E – Generate an error message and stop execution of the job.

UPCPPM311 Screens:

Create IMB Mailpiece File/IM®pB USPS Shipping Service File

Whether to create IMB Mail Piece File/ IM® Package barcode USPS Shipping Services file.

X Create the Mail Piece File in an XML file format (valid for Intelligent Mail barcodes only).

M Create the Mail Piece File in a flat file format (valid for Intelligent Mail barcodes only).

S Create the USPS Shipping Services file (valid for Intelligent Mail Package barcodes only).

N Do not create either file.

blank Default is N.

USPS Shipping Service File Detail Level

Specify a code to indicate the USPS Shipping Service File level of detail.

B Batch and Entry Point

E Entry Point only

blank Default is B.

IM®pB USPS Shipping Service File Type

Specify a code to indicate the Intelligent Mail Package barcode USPS Shipping Service file type to create.

2 Tracking File

Blank Default is 2.

Create the Optional D2 Record for Shipping Service File?

Specify a code to indicate whether to create the optional D2 record for the USPS Shipping Service file.

Y Yes, create the optional D2 record.

N (Default) No, do not create the optional D2 record.

Serial Number Assignment Mode for SSF Electronic File Number

M (Default) Use manual numbering/assignments for the SSF file.

A Use automatic numbering/assignments for the SSF file.

NOTE: You can only use the A (Auto) option if you have MAIL360™.




4. Press F13 to define IMBSER processing details on screen UPCPSR11.

Define your processing details as follows:

Use the first available blank Rec[ord] line for this definition.

5. Press F6.

6. Page down to define IMBOUT outbound mailpiece processing details.

Fill in the outbound mailpiece processing details as follows:

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPSR11 Job MYJOB Presort Definition [IMBSER] Specify Mailer ID and Starting Serial Number.

Starting Rec Mailer ID Serial Number 1 123456 000000001 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10



Mailer ID 123456 (left justified) to define the Mailer ID.

Starting Serial Number

000000001 (right justified) to define the starting serial number for the Mailer ID.


Position on NA Record

The starting position and length of the 31-character IMB information posted to the record; for example:

• 451 to indicate the position (Pos)

• 31 to indicate the length (Len) - This is filled in for you by MailStream Plus

Pre-assigned Intelligent Mail Barcode Indicator


Location of Mailer ID I – The mail ID is defined in the report information variable (xxxINF) parameter with sub keyword IMBMLR.



Location of Mailer ID If In Record


Location of Default Service Type ID

Location of the default Service Type ID:

C – The default Service Type ID is specified in these fields:

• Default non-automation Service Type ID/Location of Default Service Type ID

• Default Service Type ID for Full Service/Basic Service Intelligent Mail Barcodes

NOTE: This field must not be blank.

Non-Auto Service Type ID/Location of Service Type ID in record

702 – To specify the default service type to use for all Non-Automation Intelligent Mail barcodes.

Allow Full Service STID to be used for Non-Auto Mail


Full Service/Basic Service type

037 – To specify the default service type to use for the Full Service/Basic Intelligent Mail barcodes

Page down to the next screen to complete your definitions for IMBOUT.

Serial Number Assignment

M – Method used to generate serial numbers for the current job: Manually assign serial numbers.

An “M” in this field requires you to also define IMBSER processing details. See page 176 for more information.

NOTE: Using MailStream’s manual numbering engine does not guarantee any uniqueness period required by the USPS for full service discounts. It is the responsibility of the user to keep track of the last serial number used and update accordingly.

Serial Number for all 6-Digit Mailer IDs


Serial Number for all 9-Digit Mailer IDs


Location of Serial Number in input record


NOTE: MailStream Plus accepts a 6- or 9-digit serial number from the input file.

Location on NA record to post TADF Payload for IMB or Banner Text and Human Readable for IMpB

483 – Output name/address record location to post the (LENGTH=3/4)65-character Payload string.




7. Page down to define PERNAM, FRMNAM, and ADDRES details.

Fill in the definitions as follows:

8. Page down to define IMBCNT and IMBPLT processing details.

• IMBPLT creates the 21-digit pallet Intelligent Mail barcode number.

• IMBCNT creates the 24-digit tray/bag Intelligent Mail barcode number.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM361 Job MYJOB MAIL360 Parameters Specify Outbound IMB Columns:

[PERNAM] Pos Len Prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 First name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Last name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Suffix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 [FRMNAM] Company name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [ADDRES] Primary address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64 Secondary address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64 City name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 State code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 More... ________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F6=Update F13=IMBSER


Prefix Define the location and length of the input prefix field (for example, Mr. or Mrs.)

First name Define the location and length of the input first name field

Last name Define the location and length of the input last name field

Suffix Define the location and length of the input suffix field (for example, PhD or CPA)

Company Name Define the location and length of the input company name field

Primary address Define the location and length of the input primary address field

Secondary address Define the location and length of the input secondary address field

City name Define the location and length of the input city name field

State code Define the location of the two-character input state code



.

Define your processing details as follows:

If your site is licensed for Palletization Plus, you are palletizing your job, and you want to create the 21-digit pallet Intelligent Mail barcode number, you must add the IMBPLT definitions to your job as shown below.


MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPM300 UPCPM366 Job MYJOB MAIL360 Parameters [IMBPLT] Pallet IMB Barcode: Mailer ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mailer ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 6 (Dft: 9) Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft: Y) [IMBCNT] Tray/Bag IMB Barcode: Mailer ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mailer ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 6 (Dft: 9) Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y, N (Dft: Y)



Mailer ID (IMBPLT) 123456 - Mailer ID for the pallet barcode number

Mailer ID format (IMBPLT)

6 - 6-digit Mailer ID

Serial Number (IMBPLT)

000000001 - Starting serial number for the pallet barcode number

Save serial number (IMBPLT)


Mailer ID (IMBCNT) 123456 - Mailer ID for the pallet barcode number

Mailer ID format (IMBCNT)

6 - 6-digit Mailer ID

Serial Number (IMBCNT)

000000001 - Starting serial number for the pallet barcode number

Save serial number (IMBCNT)




10. From the Define/Submit screen, type 2 (to edit) or 6 (to create) next to RI to work with report information.

MailStream Plus displays screen UPCPRI11 to define information for USPS reports.

11. Select F10 to display report information variables.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPDS00 UPCPDS01 Job MYJOB Define and/or Submit a Presort Job


PX Defaults for Print Output 03/30/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D PA Mailing Piece Attributes 03/30/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D ST Name/Address File Layout 03/30/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D PD Presort Definition 03/30/YYYY 17:23:53 PLAT00D NA Name/Address Record Posting 03/30/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D M3 MAIL360 RI 2 Information for USPS Reports 03/30/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D RR Report Selection 03/30/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D

SB Submit Batch Job


23:15:27 MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPRI00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPRI11 Job MYJOB Information for USPS Reports B Rls [BATINF] [EP INF] [RP INF] (CAPS on) Report Information Table Size . . -- Batch or EP Range -- Item Data Level Low High MDLPCN JOHN DOE G MDLPCO PITNEY BOWES SOFTWARE G MDLPCT 800-123-1234 G MDLPPC X123 G MDMFJI IVP G MDLPEM [email protected] G MDLPJI IVP G MDLPJN 0001 G WSDATE 01/25/YYYY G MDMFSD 01/25/YYYY901/20/YYYY01:55 G MDMFCF R P 1234567890123 12345 G CFMAIL 00000001 00000002 G




12. Type G in the Level field.

13. Page down to locate the IMBMLR report information variable.

14. In the Data field, type 123456 to define your Mailer ID.

15. Press ENTER to add the IMBMLR variable and return to the main Information for USPS Reports screen, then press F6 to save the displayed variables.

IMBMLR defines the USPS-assigned Mailer ID for the mailpiece Intelligent Mail barcode.

16. If you defined the IMBCTL parameter record to set up Intelligent Mail barcodes, the following parameters are also required:

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPRI00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPRI21 Job MYJOB Information for USPS Reports B (CAPS on) Supply Data to Select. Level G - Global Low Batch/EP Press Enter. E - EP Range High Batch/EP B - Batch Range Position to: Item Description Len Data (*N interpreted as blank) ACSCOD Address Correction Service Code 8 AGTAD1 Agent Address Line 1 30 AGTAD2 Agent Address Line 2 30 AGTAD3 Agent Address Line 3 30 AGTNAM Agent Name 30 AGTTEL Agent Telephone Number 14 PB Advertising Percent Basis 7 GLIN4 Bag/Tray Tag Line 4 38 BGLIN5 Bag/Tray Tag Line 5 38 DAUTO Coded Date Automation 10 CDCARR Coded Date Carrier 10 FMAIL Confirm/ASN Code 19

F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=Set CAPS off F17=Top F18=Bottom

Define this Parameter Record... On IBM® i Screen... To Post...

POSTBI UPCPNA13 > NA (Name Address Record Posting) > F15

Batch Code information

POSTEI UPCPNA13 > NA (Name Address Record Posting) > F15

Entry Point information

POSTLI UPCPNA13 > NA (Name Address Record Posting) > F15

Pallet IM® Barcode Number Only When Creating the SSF File

POSTCI UPCPNA13 > NA (Name Address Record Posting) > F15

Container Number or Post Container IM® Barcode Number Only When Creating the SSF File



Completing Your Definitions

Additional considerations in setting up Intelligent Mail barcodes include:

• Remember to change the output file, MSNAON, to accommodate all values posted to the name/address file. You can change this definition on the Submit Batch Job screens, using the Output Record length field.

• To omit the required POSTxx parameters from the final output file and instead use memory to write these values, use the ADDLBF parameter record. Define this parameter from screen UPCRDEDT (F23 from the Define/Submit screen).

Add a value to positions 13-16 to indicate how many bytes you want to write out in buffer space as shown here:

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+

ADDLBF 0100

POSTPI UPCPNA13 > NA (Name Address Record Posting) > F15

Bundle Number

POSTRC UPCPNA13 > NA (Name Address Record Posting) > F15

Location to post the Pricing Tier Indicator; Location to post the Full Service Eligibility flag

POSTRI UPCPNA13 > NA (Name Address Record Posting) > F15

Final Sort Sequence Number

POSTMD NA (Name Address Record Posting) > Page Down multiple times

Mail.dat single piece information

Define this Parameter Record... On IBM® i Screen... To Post...



Specifying 100 bytes for the ADDLBF parameter record as shown previously allows you to write the POSTxx parameters as:

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+

POSTBI 501POSTEI 511

POSTLI 521

POSTCI 531POSTPI 541

POSTRI 551

POSTMD 561

None of these values display in the name and address file.

• If the length of your output file, including the 31-character Intelligent Mail barcode value and the (65-character) output TADF Payload value, puts your final record length at 500 bytes, enter the output record length as shown here:

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+FILEDF MSNAON L 0500

You can change this definition on the Submit Batch Job screens, using the Output Record length field.


11
Defining Optional Processing
Advanced Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Introducing Mail.dat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Required User License Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Mail.dat Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 File Naming for Media or Electronic File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . .189 Required User License Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Mail.dat Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Defining Processing With the MailStream Plus CHUI Screens .197

Palletization Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 What is a Pallet? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 How Do I Palletize the Mail? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 How Does Palletization Plus Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Assign Bags and/or Packages to Pallets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Palletization Plus Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Files and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Report Information File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Defining Palletization Plus Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Pallet Tags Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 The USPS Manifest Mailing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Complying with USPS Manifest Mailing System Requirements215 Handling Damaged and “Pulled” Mailpieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Manifest Reporting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Numbering Mailpieces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Posting Output Key Line Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Defining the Manifest Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

Defining the Manifest Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Running a Job - RTYPES Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Program MREX00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Program MRAT00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Setting Up and Submitting an RTYPES Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Program MRAT00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Creating Trays of Mail for Machine Presorting . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Who Benefits?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Sample User Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Key Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 DuoSort Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Additional Optional Parameter Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Step-by-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

Advanced Processing Options

Advanced Processing Options

If you are comfortable with basic job definitions, you are ready to move on to more advanced processing options. These options are:

• Parameter Verification - The parameter verification program allows you to test your job before you run it, checking for:

• Syntax errors

• Parameter file content

• Parameter accuracy

Chapter 7 has step-by-step instructions for running the Parameter Verification Program.

• Mail.dat - An industry-standard reporting utility developed to assist mail-related vendors in communicating mail production and processing information.

• Palletization Plus - Facilitates the assembly of mail pallets. Allows mailers to reduce the time and labor required for the preparation of large mailings.

• Manifest Reporting Plus - Generates a postage fee document for all pieces in a mailing, grouping the pieces by weight. This document complies with the USPS Manifest Mailing System.

• RTYPES - Produces a final output file in presorted order, with the header and trailer records matched to one another.

• Intelligent Mail® barcoding - MAIL360 is used by mailers who want to interface with the MAIL360 numbering engine to automatically number and generate a mailpiece barcode.

Once you define your input files and parameters, run the verification program to ensure that everything is syntactically correct. This program can check jobs to comply with the latest program changes.

It does allow printing of a report that shows all the values that are used internally based on the parameters that are read and processed. This allows us to see the effect that one parameter makes on other parameters and defaults.


Chapter 11: Defining Optional ProcessingIntroducing Mail.dat

Introducing Mail.dat

Please see your Chapter 2 of your MailStream Plus Reference Guide, “MailStream Plus Report Information Fields” for more information on defining your Mail.dat® report information.

Mail.dat is an industry-standard database format developed to assist mail-related vendors in communicating mail production and processing information. Established by Idealliance, the Mail.dat standard provides vendors with an electronic medium for the exchange of mail production and processing information. MailStream Plus has the capability of generating Mail.dat files based on this standard.

On the IBM® i platform, use the Report Information component, screens UPCRMD01 and

UPCRMD02, to define your Mail.dat® report.

Required User License Code

Before creating Mail.dat files, you must acquire a User License Code. The User License Code is a unique four-position alphanumeric code that assures exclusive identification for you and your files.

User License Codes are supplied by Pitney Bowes Software as part of your MailStream Plus maintenance. If needed, licenses can also be purchased from Idealliance. Copies of the Mail.dat record and file specifications are also available from Idealliance. Contact Idealliance at their web site: http://www.idealliance.org.

Mail.dat Files

Mail.dat accounts for the preparation and presentation variables that can exist within a given mailing. Types of information include package, sack, and pallet data such as number of copies, weight, thickness, rate type, and destination. Mail.dat produces several files.

For detailed information on the Mail.dat output files, including current and previous versions’ file lengths, visit http://www.idealliance.org.

All Mail.dat output files are produced as sequential files. The output files may be converted between EBCDIC and ASCII with no loss of information. You can use FTP or another file transfer method for downloading.

Mail.dat Output Files (Part 1 of 2)

Required FileFile ext. Description

Component Characteristic Record (CCR) file

.ccr The Component Characteristic Record file is produced based on data contained in the Mail.dat MDMLCT (content of mail), MDICID (incentive IDs), and MDFEID (fee IDs) RP INF parameters.

Component file .cpt One record is produced for each piece attribute (P ATTR) within each segment.


http://www.idealliance.org

http://www.idealliance.org


Container Quantity file

.cqt Multiple records are produced for each sack, tray, or pallet depending on changes in rates, subscriber codes, in-county codes, and so on.

Container Summary file

.csm One record is produced for each sack, tray, or pallet (of packages). (Pallets of sacks or trays are handled differently.)

Extra Piece Detail file .epd Produces the extra [mail] piece data file used to define mailer ID information

Header file .hdr One record is produced for the whole job. A report on the information in this file is produced along with the other reports in the RPT file.

InkJet Container file .icr Indicates where to post the InkJet Container file information in the name/address file.

Mailpiece Unit/Component Relationship

.mcr One record is produced for each piece attribute (P ATTR) within each segment.

Mailer Postage Account

.mpa This is the mailer postage account record.

Mailpiece Unit file .mpu One record is produced for each piece attribute (P ATTR) within each segment.

Piece Barcode Record file

.pbc Produces the piece barcode record.

Piece Detail file .pdr Produces the piece detail record.

Package Quantity file .pqt Multiple records are produced for each package, sack, tray, or pallet depending on changes such as rates, subscriber codes, and in-county codes.

Segment file .seg One record is produced for each segment. A segment is a portion of the mailing presented to the USPS with its own Postage Statement.

Special Fee Barcode File

.sfb Records specific ancillary fees (linked to the .PDR or .PBC); used only for extra services

Special Fees/Charges file

.sfr One record is produced for each additional charge or special service.

Seed Name file .snr One record is produced for every non-blank seed name code in the name/address records.

Un-Coded Parcels Address file

.upa One record is produced for each un-coded parcel address.

Walk-sequence file .wsr One record is produced for every carrier route in a walk-sequence mailing. Because this file must be sorted when it is produced, it cannot be written directly to tape.

Mail.dat Output Files (Part 2 of 2)

Required FileFile ext. Description



File Naming for Media or Electronic File Transfer

This applies to Idealliance conventions for naming files when sending them to another site, not internal file names on your platform. Idealliance-assigned naming standard for these files is PPPPJJJJ.EEE. This is broken out as follows:

• PPPP is Idealliance-assigned User License Code

• JJJJ is a job identification code assigned by the list processor and

• EEE is the file extension.

The following table contains the position and description of each component of the File Name.

Required User License Code

Before creating Mail.dat files, you must acquire a User License Code. The User License Code is a unique four-position alphanumeric code that assures exclusive identification for you and your files.

Component File Name Descriptions

Components Position Description

User License Code

1-4 Alphanumeric code unique to Mail.dat User License Code (List Processor)

File Set ID 5-8 Alphanumeric identifier defined by user

Period Point 9 Delimiter between filename and extension

Extension 10-12 Alpha code unique to each file type:

.ccr = Component Characteristics Record

.cpt = Component file

.cqt = Container Quantity file

.csm = Container Summary file

.epd = Extra Piece Detail file

.hdr = Header file

.icr = InkJet Container file

.mcr = Mailpiece Unit/Component Relationship

.mpa = Mailer Postage Account

.mpu = Mailpiece Unit file

.pbc = Mailpiece barcode record file

.pdr = Piece Detail file

.pqt = Package Quantity file

.seg =Segment file

.sfb = Special fee barcode file

.sfr= Special Fees/Charges file

.snr = Seed name file

.upa= Un-Coded Parcels Address file

.wsr = Walk-sequence file



Mail.dat Job Setup Procedure

Mail.dat requires information to be collected before processing. This information is used to define file names, establish processing criteria, and populate various fields within Mail.dat. This procedure in this chapter was designed to help collect that information and provide information on setting up parameters for MailStream Plus.

Idealliance Mail.dat file extensions are listed on each item, indicating where the update is made. The RP INF parameters are listed with the REPORT MAILDAT parameter in the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.

Many of the RP INF parameters may be put on EP INF parameters for entry point processing, or on BATINF parameters for batch processing. An example of when EP INF or BATINF parameters do not apply is for required fields in the single header (.hdr) record.

Be very careful to use the correct format specified. Mail.dat cannot accept data in the wrong format. Formats are defined as X for alphanumeric or N for numeric. A number following specifies the maximum number of characters. Many entries allow for less than the maximum.

For example:

• N(14) Means 14 digits and must be numeric. Special characters like decimal point “.” and minus sign “-” are allowed only where specified.

• X(30) Means 30 characters long and may include any letters, digits, and spaces.

• Any numeric field defined as a date also allows the slash character “/”. For example, 12/31/2015. All dates are checked to be within date range and cannot be all zeros. Months must be between 1-12. Days must be between1-31.

There are four parts to the Mail.dat job setup procedure.

• Part 1 covers all of the options on the REPORT MAILDAT parameter. This parameter is required in order to generate the Mail.dat files.

• Part 2 covers how to establish the external Mail.dat file names.

• Part 3 covers required INF parameters. These parameters must be completed correctly. If not, MailStream Plus may not generate the Mail.dat files, or the files may be incorrect.

• Part 4 covers the optional INF parameters.



Part 1. Set up the REPORT MAILDAT Parameter

This step involves setting up the REPORT MAILDAT parameter for Mail.dat processing.

REPORT MAILDAT Parameter (Part 1 of 4)

ActionMail.dat File(s) Description

Indicate whether to populate the seed name file.

.snr Select a code to indicate whether to populate the seed name file (.snr):

• If yes, place Y in position 32, and do the following:

– Define the S CODE parameter and at least one of the K CODE or L CODE parameters. If there is no list code or key code in the name and address record, use the first 3 digits of the ZIP Code as the key code. Each record selected by the S CODE parameter must have a non-blank key code.

– Format: NNNNN

Location and length of seed name code in the name and address record. Place the location and length on the S CODE parameter. The maximum length is 22 bytes.

– Format: NNNNN

Location and length of key code or list code in the name and address record. Place the location and length on the K CODE or L CODE parameter.

• If no, place N in position 32.

Blank defaults to N.

NOTE: Mail.dat standards require that each Seed Name record be unique when looking at the combined Seed Name ID and Version Key Code fields in the .snr file. MailStream Plus does not verify that uniqueness. The Mail.dat application that imports the file set may give a warning if encountering any non-unique .snr records. One way to guarantee uniqueness is to point the S CODE or K CODE parameter to the CONTRL parameter field, which is unique for each record.

Indicate whether to populate the Special Fees/Charges file.

.sfr Select a code to indicate whether to populate the Special Fees/Charges file (.sfr).

• If yes, place Y in position 33.



To create this file, you must also create the .pdr file (REPORT MAILDAT position 36 = Y) and you must be processing a Bound Printed Matter Presort (ML TYP position 12 = B).

Indicate whether to populate the Un-Coded Parcel Address file.

.upa Select a code to indicate whether to populate the Un-Coded Parcel Address file (.upa).




NOTE: To create this file, you must also create the .pdr file (REPORT MAILDAT position 36 = Y) and you must be processing a Bound Printed Matter Presort (ML TYP position 12 = B).



Indicate whether to populate the optional InkJet Container file.

.icr Select a code to indicate whether to populate the optional InkJet Container file (.icr):




Indicate whether to populate the piece detail file.

.pdr Select a code to indicate whether to populate the piece detail file (.pdr):

• If yes, place Y in position 36 and do the following:

– If each name and address record has a unique identifier, specify its location on the optional U CODE parameter. If this is not specified, the MailStream Plus sequence number is used instead.

– Format: NNNNN

Location of unique identifier in the name and address record. Place this location on the U CODE parameter.


Blank defaults to Y for the previous format Intelligent Mail barcode eligible mail. Default is Y for the current format.

NOTE: To receive a valid Intelligent Mail Range file, the OPT FL parameter must be active (either not in the parameters or position 8 must be ‘Y’) to create the Name Record Control file MSWKNRC file.

Indicate whether to populate the component characteristic record file.

.ccr Select a code to indicate whether to produce the Component Characteristic Record file (.ccr).

Y Produce the Component Characteristic Record file, position 37.

N Do not produce the Component Characteristic Record file.

blank Default is N.

NOTE: When selected to be produced, the Component Characteristic Record file is populated based on the data in the Mail.dat MDMLCT (content of mail), MDICID (incentive IDs), and MDFEID (fee IDs) PA INF parameter(s).

Produce Special Fees Barcode (*.SFB) file

.sfb Define whether to produce the Special Fees Barcode file (.sfb).

Y Produce the Special Fees Barcode file, position 38

N Do not produce the Special Fees Barcode file

blank Default is N.

Produce Extra Piece Detail file (*.EPD)

.epd Define whether to populate the extra piece detail file (.epd):

Y Produce the extra piece detail file.

N Do not Produce the extra piece detail file.

Blank Default is N.





Indicate whether to populate the piece barcode record file.

.pbc Select a code to indicate whether to produce the Piece Barcode Record file (.pbc).

Y Produce the Piece Barcode Record file, position 39

N Do not produce the Piece Barcode Record file.

Blank Default is N.

Indicate whether to produce multiple segments.

.seg Select a code to indicate whether to produce multiple segments (.seg):

• If yes, place B in position 40 to create segments by batch code. Segmenting is generally discouraged, unless necessary.



NOTE: This only applies when the mailing is being batched. See the B CODE parameter for more information. If segmenting on part of the batch code is requested, place the beginning position and length values in positions 41 and 42 of the REPORT MAILDAT parameter; otherwise, leave blank.

If segmenting by batch and there are multiple entry points, we suggest that you do the following to avoid multiple batch segment breaks by entry points:• Use SRTFLn parameters to put the batch sort field (002) before the entry point sort field (001).• Do not use REPORT MAILDAT position 45 to sequence the sort by entry point.

Indicate whether to use the piece attribute code or the index number as the mailpiece unit ID.

CQT-1003MPU-1003MCR-1003

Select a code to indicate whether to use the piece attribute code or the index number as the mailpiece unit ID:

• Place I in position 44 to use index numbers, not piece attribute codes. The index number, if used, is the ordinal number of the piece attribute code after sorting the codes alphabetically.

• Place F in position 44 to use fit only, index otherwise. If the piece attribute code fits within 5 bytes, use it for the mailpiece unit ID; otherwise, use the index. If the piece attribute code fits within 8 bytes, use it for the component ID; otherwise, use the index.

Blank defaults to I.





Define the sort sequence for the output segments and container summaries.

Select a code to indicate the sort sequence for the output segments and container summaries:

• Place E in position 45 to use the following entry sequence: Entry point Batch code Pallet number Bag/tray number Bundle number Rate code ZIP Code Final sequence

• Place M in position 45 to use the mailing sequence. This is the order specified on the SRTFLn parameters.

Blank defaults to M.

Indicate whether to continue processing if the generated Mail.dat files are incomplete or invalid.

Select a code to indicate whether to continue processing if the generated Mail.dat files are incomplete or invalid.

• Place a W in position 46 to produce a warning in the Execution Log report and continue.

• Place an E in position 46 to produce an error in the Execution Log report and terminate the MSRP00 step.

Blank defaults to E.

NOTE: This situation could occur for a variety of reasons. For instance, when the input name/address file has all invalid ZIP Codes, certain required files in Mail.dat are not generated.

Indicate whether to verify the PostalOne! required fields.

Select a code to indicate whether to verify the PostalOne! required xxx INF fields:

• Place a P in position 47 to generate an error if any PostalOne! required fields are blank.

• Place an N in position 47 not to generate an error if any PostalOne! required fields are blank.


Indicate the Mail.dat record format to create.

Select a code to indicate whether to create the “previous” or “current” record format. “Current” is the current Idealliance Mail.dat standard. “Previous” is the previous Mail.dat standard.

• Place a C in position 72 to create the current Mail.dat.

• Place a P in position 72 to create the previous Mail.dat format.

Blank defaults to C.





Part 2. Set Up the External File Names

Define this information to set up the external file names:

Part 3. Set Up the Required INF Parameters

These parameters are required for Mail.dat processing.

Required Information for External File Names

Action Length Description

Define the Idealliance-supplied User License Code (previously called the Provider Code).

X(04) User License Codes are supplied by Pitney Bowes Software as part of your MailStream Plus maintenance. If needed, licenses can also be purchased from Idealliance.

NOTE: maintenance. If needed, licenses can also be purchased from Idealliance.The User License Code and Provider Code are used interchangeably by Idealliance. Both terms refer to the same code.

Define the file set ID. X(04) The file set ID is defined by the list processor. The file set ID must change for each job and be unique for a 12-month period. You may wish to make them serial numbers, or you may wish to put in other information such as the year and month.

Required INF Parameters (Part 1 of 2)

Action ParameterLength (max)

Mail.dat Field

Code(s) Description

Define the Idealliance assigned User License Code.

RP INF MDLPPC X(04) HDR-1105 Mail.dat User License Code (previously called the provider code). This code comes from Idealliance, but is assigned and provided to you by Pitney Bowes Software as part of your MailStream Plus maintenance.

Required for Mail.dat and for PostalOne!.

If this code is left blank:

• Only the Mail.dat .csm file is produced.

• All other required Mail.dat parameters are no longer required.

• The verify PostalOne! option is turned off.

Define the Mail.dat list processor’s job ID.

X(25) HDR-1102 Mail.dat list processor's job ID.

Required for PostalOne!.

It is recommended to use the file name defined in Part 2, Steps 1 & 2, unless otherwise defined. For example, if the User License Code were ACME and the file set ID were 0112, then this list processor job ID could be ACME0112. There is no default.



Part 4. Set Up the Optional INF Parameters

To set up optional INF parameters, please refer to the MailStream Plus Report Information Fields table in Chapter 2 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.

Define the Mail.dat mail presentation category.

X(1) HDR-1154 Mail.dat mail presentation category.

I Manifest Individual

M MLOCR

N Single Piece

P Conventional Presort

S Manifest Summary

blank Defaults to P.

Available only for the RP INF parameter. Mail.dat processing generates a warning if one of the values above is not found.

Required for Mail.dat.

Define the list processor’s e-mail, part 1.

RP INF MDLPEM X(30) HDR-1157 Mail.dat list processor's e-mail, part 1. This and the MDLPE2 comprise the 60-character e-mail address.


Define the list processor’s e-mail, part 2.

X(30) HDR-1157 Mail.dat list processor's e-mail, part 2. This and the MDLPEM comprise the 60-character e-mail address. Optional.

Define the Mail.dat job name.

RP INF MDLPJN X(30) HDR-1103 Mail.dat job name. There is no default.


Define the Mail.dat contact name.

RP INF MDLPCN X(30) HDR-1106 Mail.dat contact name. There is no default.


Define the Mail.dat contact telephone number.

RP INF MDLPCT N(14) HDR-1107 Mail.dat contact telephone number. This may include / or - characters. There is no default.


Define the Mail.dat Company name.

RP INF MDLPCO X(30) HDR-1104 Mail.dat company name. There is no default.


If this is a walk sequence mailing, define the walk sequence update date.

N(14) SEG-1131WSR-1104

Walk-sequence update date. The default is space.

Required for Mail.dat for walk-sequence mailings.

Use the YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY date format.

Required INF Parameters (Part 2 of 2)

Action ParameterLength (max)

Mail.dat Field

Code(s) Description



Defining Processing With the MailStream Plus CHUI Screens

1. Enter 2 or 6 in front of the Name/Address Record Posting option.

2. On the next screen, enter the starting position and length of the seed code that Mail.dat will use (if any) in the Seed Code (w/compare values) field.

The S CODE parameter points to the name/address file location of a seed name for the Mail.dat seed name record (.snr) file. It can also be used to exclude values from the output seed name file. If the S CODE value from the name/address record is equal to some value other than blank spaces or binary zeroes, it is included in the output seed name file. If you specify one or two comparative values, any S CODE that is equal to either of these values is treated as if it contains binary zeroes or spaces. In short, inclusion logic (names equal to or “EQ”) is implied. Anything other than a null value is included in the output file. This is the reverse of some other Pitney Bowes product logic (Merge/Purge, for example), because it would be nearly impossible for you to define each seed name on your parameters.

3. Tab to the U CODE field to define a unique piece code to identify each name/address record in your mailing.

4. In the Unique Piece Code field, enter the starting position and length of the piece code.

5. Press F6 to save your definition.


7. Enter a 2 or 6 in front of the Report Selection field; Press ENTER.

10:38:30 MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCPDS00 UPCPDS01 Job MYJOB Define and/or Submit a Presort Job Rls Type options, press Enter. 2=Edit 6=Create *-------- Last Activity ---------* Opt Function Date Time User

PX Defaults for Print Output 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D PA Mailing Piece Attributes 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D ST Name/Address File Layout 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D PD Presort Definition 03/31/YYYY 17:23:53 PLAT00D NA Name/Address Record Posting 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D M3 MAIL360 03/31/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D RI Information for USPS Reports 03/31/YYYY 12:02:58 PLAT00D RR 2 Report Selection 03/31/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D

SB Submit Batch Job 03/31/YYYY 12:02:59 PLAT00D F3=Exit F12=PrevScrn F20=View Parm File F23=Card Edit



You will see the Work with Reports screen.

Our example shows the reports already defined for the current job.

8. Press F10 to show additional reports to define.

13:05:06 MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System T UPCPRR00 Replace with screen heading desired M UPCPRR11 Job MYJOB Work with Reports B [REPORT] Type options, press Enter. 4=Delete 12=Work with

Nr Opt Report Description Copy Details Selection Bag Tags Tray Tags Facing Slips Mail Content Audit Report Detail Report ZIP-Sequence Detail Report Zone Summary Standardized Documentation Carrier Walk-Sequence Report F3=Exit F6=Update F10=Select Report F17=Top F18=Bottom



9. Enter 1 on the line next to MAIL.DAT File Build and Report, and press Enter to display the first Mail.dat report definition screen, UPCRMD01.

When using subkeywords that populate fields in optional Mail.dat files, you must turn on the optional file using the REPORT MAILDAT parameter. Using subkeywords that populate an optional file does not automatically produce the optional file. Define this report using “Report Selection” from the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, UPCPDS01, and adding “MAIL.DAT File Build and Report” to your job.

10. Fill in the details for your Mail.dat report. This report definition is in three parts: Report Selection Criteria Definitions, Report Content and Appearance Definitions, and Defining Report Information Variables. Only one report selection criterion definition is needed.

Be sure to page down to define segment, batch code, sequence, PostalONE! and Record format processing details.

MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System UPCRMD00 UPCRMD01 Job MYJOB Report Selection

[REPORT] Enter report selection criteria: Auto Mach N-A A-C E-C Plt Carr P-S Res Copies Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Mail Rate Rate Rate

[TABLSZ] CQT Dft: 3000, Max: 9999 [TABLSZ] PQT Dft: 15000, Max: 45000

[REPORT MAILDAT] Specify Report content and appearance: Produce Inkjet Container file (ICR)?. . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N) Produce Piece Detail Record file (PDR)? . . . . . . . . . . Y, N Produce Special Fees/Charges Record (SFR)?. . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N) Produce Un-Coded Parcel Address Record (UPA)? . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N) Produce Seed Name file (SNR)? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y N, Y (Dft: N) Produce Component Characteristic Record file (CCR)? . . . . N, Y (Dft: N) Produce Special Fees Barcoded (SFB)?. . . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N) Produce Extra Piece Detail file (EPD)?. . . . . . . . . . . N, Y (Dft: N)

More... F3=Exit F6=Accept



Report Selection Criteria Definitions

On many of the report screens, there are columns under the heading "Enter Report Selection Criteria." These are the fields you use to define the amount of/content of information in your report.

Leave these positions blank, using the default values, or use the following table to define non-default definitions.


Copies Number of copies of this report to print. Default is 1.

1-9

NOTE: This field is ignored for the BAGTAGS, CONTTAGS, and TRAYTAGS reports.

Auto Mail Automated Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the Automated portion of the mailing

A Report automated mail

N Do not report automated mail

X Print all levels of detail — automation and non-automation — on the report

blank Default is X

Mach Mail Machinable Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the Machinable portion of the mailing

U Report Machinable mail.

N No, do not report Machinable mail.

X Include in report.

blank Default is X.

N-A Mail Non-Automated Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the non-Automated portion of the mailing

O Report non-automated mail

N Do not report non-automated mail

X Print all levels of detail — non-automated and automated — on the report

blank Default is X

A-C Mail Automated Carrier Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the Automated Carrier portion of the mailing

C Report automated carrier mail

N Do not report automated carrier mail

X Print all levels of detail — automated carrier and non-automated carrier — on the report

blank Default is X

E-C Mail Enhanced Carrier Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the enhanced carrier route portion of the mailing

E Report enhanced carrier mail

N Do not report enhanced carrier mail

X Print all levels of detail — enhanced carrier and non-enhanced carrier — on the report

blank Default is X



1. Define the CQT and PQT Table Sizes (TABLSZ).

Report Content and Appearance Definitions

1. In the Produce Inkjet Container file (ICR)? field, specify a code indicating whether to produce this file. Your options are:

Plt Mail Palletized Mailing Selection - Code indicating whether to report the palletized portion of the mailing, if any

P Report Palletized mail only

N Do not report Palletized mail

X Print all levels of detail — palletized and non-palletized — on the report

blank Default is X

Carr Rate Carrier Route Rate Selection - Code indicating whether to report the Carrier Route rate portion of the mailing

Y Report Carrier Route rate mail.

N Do not report Carrier Route rate mail.

blank Default is Y

P-S Rate Include Presort Rate - Code indicting whether to report the Presort rate portion of the mailing

Y Report Presort rate mail.

N Do not report Presort rate mail.

blank Default is Y for all reports except REPORT FACESLIP.

Res Rate Include Basic/Residual Rate - Code indicating whether to report the Basic/Residual rate portion of the mailing

Y Report Basic/Residual rate mail

N Do not report Basic/Residual rate mail

blank Default is Y


Table Name Description Default

CQT Mail.dat .cqt package quantity file. Provides information on the destination and quantity for each bundle.

3000

PQT Mail.dat .pqt container quantity file. Provides information on the rates, zones, and mailpieces (P ATTR) for each container.

15000

Code Definition

Y Yes, produce Inkjet Container file.

N or blank No, do not produce inkjet file.



2. In the Piece Detail Record file (PDR)? field, specify a code to indicate whether to produce this file.

The piece detail record file contains useful information that helps you to track mailing pieces or produce reports. Piece detail record file processing requires significant storage space and processing overhead. We suggest that you consider carefully these issues before generating this information.

Your options are:

3. In the Produce Special Fees/Charges Record (SFR)? field, specify one of the following codes

to indicate whether to produce this file:

4. In the Produce Un-Coded Parcel Address Record (UPA)? field, specify one of the following

codes to indicate whether to produce this file:

5. In the Produce Seed Name file (SNR)? field, specify one of the following codes to indicate

whether to produce this file. Your options are:

Code Definition

Y Yes, produce this file.

N No, do not produce this file.

blank Default is “Y."

Code Definition

N or blank No, do not produce this file.

Y Yes, do not produce this file.

Code Definition


Y Yes, do not produce this file.

Code Definition





6. In the Produce Piece Barcode Record file (PBC)? field, specify one of the following codes to

indicate whether to produce this file. Your options are:

In the Produce Component Characteristics Record (CCR)? field, specify one of the following codes to indicate whether to produce this file. When selected to be produced, the Component Characteristic Record file is populated based on the data in the Mail.dat MDMLCT (content of mail), MDICID (incentive IDs), and MDFEID (fee IDs) PA INF parameter record(s).

Your options are:

In he Produce Special Fees Barcoded (SFB)? field, specify one of the following codes to

indicate whet er to produce this file. Your options are:

7. Page Down to complete your Mail.dat report definitions.

8. In the Segments field, specify the conditions for creating segment breaks. Your choices are:

Code Definition

Y or blank Yes, produce this file.


Code Definition

Y or blank Yes, produce this file.


Code Definition



Code Definition

B Create a segment for every entry batch.

Segmenting is discouraged. If segmenting by batch and there are multiple entry points, then you should expect multiple batch segments by entry points. It is up to you to handle the results if this option is selected. The batch code is placed in the .csm Container Grouping Description field. Instead, we suggest that you use the.csm record for this information.

N or blank (Default) None - Do not create segments.



9. In the Batch Code Position field, specify the beginning position of the batch code you wish to use as a segment break indicator. Your choices are:

10. In the Batch Code field length field, specify the beginning position of the batch code you will use as a segment break indicator. Your choices are:

11. Specify the Mail Piece Unit ID.

Use one of the following codes to indicate whether to use the piece attribute code or the index number as the mailpiece unit ID. The index number, if used, is the ordinal number of the piece attribute code after sorting the codes alphabetically. Your choices are:

12. Enter one of the following codes to indicate whether to Abandon Processing if the Mail.dat file generated is incomplete or invalid.

13. Enter one of the following codes to specify whether you are using PostalOne! Verification:

Value Definition

1-9 Specify the beginning position of the batch code/break indicator.

blank Defaults to position 1.

Value Definition

1-9 Specify the length of the batch code/break indicator.

blank The default is to start in position 1 for a length of 9, encompassing the entire batch code field.

Value Definition

I or blank Use index numbers, not piece attribute codes.

F Fit in a 5-byte field, index otherwise. If the piece attribute code fits within 5 bytes, use it for the mailpiece unit ID, otherwise use the index. If the piece attribute code fits within 8 bytes, use it for the component ID, otherwise use the index.

Value Definition

W Produce a warning in the Execution Log report and continue.

E or blank Produce an error in the Execution Log report and terminate processing.

Value Definition

P I am using PostalOne!: Produce errors if PostalOne! fields are blank.

N or blank I am not using PostalOne!: Do not produce errors if any PostalOne! fields are blank. (default).



14. Specify whether to Use PA INF IMBMLR as default for Mailer ID in CPT-1148?

15. Enter one of the following codes to specify the Mail.dat record format you are using:

16. Press F6, F12, then F6 to save your definitions and return to the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen.

Defining Report Information Variables

The MailStream Plus Reference Guide, Chapter 2, contains a complete listing of all report subkeywords and information variables.

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, type a 2 in front of Information for USPS Reports.

2. Press ENTER to display the first Information for USPS Reports screen, UPCPRI11.Press F10 to define report variables. You will see screen UPCPRI21.

MailStream Plus requires the following information variables for Mail.dat:

Value Definition

Y or blank Yes, use the PA INF IMBMLR definition for the default Mailer ID.

N No, do not use the PA INF IMBMLR definition for the default Mailer ID.

Value Definition

C or blank I am using the current version of Mail.dat.

P I am using the previous version of Mail.dat.

Variable Max. Length Description Example Value

MDLPCN 30 List Processor Contact Name LIST PROCESSING DIVISION

MDLPCO 30 List Processor Company Name PBBI

MDLPCT 14 List Processor Contact Phone 1-800-368-5806

MDLPEM 30 List Processor e-mail address [email protected]

MDLPJN 30 List Processor Job Name MAILDAT SAMPLE JOB

MDLPPC 4 List Processor User License ID 0411



3. Using the table above, scroll through the list of report information variables, and define each one. Press ENTER to return to screen UPCPRI11. On this screen:

• The "Item" position contains the variable names.

• The "Data" position contains the user-specified variables.

• Under "Level," "G" means that the variables are global to all MailStream Plus reports.

• The Batch and Entry Point Range fields do not apply to the Mail.dat variables.


For complete descriptions of the REPORT MAILDAT fields, see Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.


Chapter 11: Defining Optional ProcessingPalletization Plus

Palletization Plus

If you attempt a palletization job and are not licensed for Palletization Plus, your job will not execute.

Palletization, introduced by the USPS in 1983, allows mailers to reduce the time and labor required for the preparation of large mailings. Palletizing requires less handling, reduces the amount of time required to process these large mailings, and generally improves the delivery time, as well as reducing labor costs. Mail is presorted according to the USPS regulations, placed into packages, bundles, trays, or bags, and placed on a large flat mailing container, or pallet. The pallets are then loaded into a USPS truck (generally at the mailer's plant) and shipped to the designated entry point. Palletizing mail at the mailer's place of business reduces the amount of handling required of the USPS.

What is a Pallet?

A pallet, sometimes called a skid, is a large, flat mailing container, approximately 48 x 40 inches that can hold up to 2200 pounds (including the weight of the pallet itself) and 65 cubic feet of mail. Mail can be stacked to a maximum of 77 inches or 12 layers of trays, whichever occurs first (including the pallet itself).

Because mail in bundles or bags (sacks) may be placed on the pallet, they must be sturdily constructed and able to be moved by fork lifts or pallet jacks. The USPS also requires that pallets be shrink-wrapped or covered with stretchable plastic to prevent the bundles of mail from slipping off the pallet base.

Under some conditions, the USPS requires that pallets be covered with a top cap. The cap must be strapped down and fastened securely to the pallet to protect the mail and prevent the pallet from opening up. Top caps are also required for pallets that are double-stacked (one on top of another).

Pallets must be clearly labelled with pallet tags. These labels contain entry point, destination, and contents information about the mail on the pallet. The tags must conform to USPS regulations as specified in the DMM.

How Do I Palletize the Mail?

The basic sortation for palletized mail is similar to the sortation for sacked mail. As basic example, flat-size mail might be palletized in a sequence similar to the following. But the DMM regulations provide the specific pallet levels and regulations required for each class and type of mailing:

• If you have 500 or more pounds of mail for the same 5-digit ZIP Code, it must be placed on a pallet labeled for that 5-digit destination.

• When you have prepared all of the 5-digit pallets that you can and you have 500 or more pounds of mail for the same 3-digit ZIP Code area, you may place the mail on a pallet labeled for that 3-digit ZIP Code.


Palletization Plus

• When you have put together all of the 5-digit pallets, all 3-digit pallets, and you have 500 or more pounds of mail destined for ZIP Codes served by the same Sectional Center Facility (SCF), you must place this mail on a pallet labeled for that SCF.

Bulk Mail Centers (BMCs) are now called NDCs (Network Delivery Centers) by the USPS®.

• Finally, you may prepare optional NDC (formerly BMC) pallets. If you have 500 or more pounds of mail for ZIP Codes served by the same Network Delivery Center (NDC), this mail may be placed on a pallet labeled for that NDC. Mail on NDC pallets must be labeled appropriately and must be machinable on NDC parcel sorters.

Other classes of mail, including Periodicals and USPS Marketing Mail, and Package Services not-flat sized mail, must follow similar rules. However, each class of mail must conform to the specific regulations set forth in the Domestic Mail Manual (DMM). Palletization Plus is designed to make these calculations for you, and generate the appropriate USPS reports.

How Does Palletization Plus Work?

Palletization Plus is designed to work with MailStream Plus, sorting your input name/address records into bundles, trays, or bags in order to arrive at the best postal discounts for your mailing. Palletization Plus takes this information from MailStream Plus, and determines the best way to combine the mail into pallets. It is not necessary to change your current JCL to use Palletization Plus.

Assign Bags and/or Packages to Pallets

Palletization Plus takes the MailStream Plus detail statistics records and assigns each bag to a pallet. The program then appends the pallet information to the detail statistics.

After Palletization Plus has finished assigning bags and bundles to pallets, MailStream Plus sorts the name/address records by pallet, bag, and bundle.

Palletization Plus Reports

Palletization Plus reports are generated by MailStream Plus using report parameters provided with Palletization Plus. The reports for palletized mail are:

• Pallet Tags (PALTAGS)

• Pallet Summary (PALSUMM)

The Pallet Tags are the actual labels required by the USPS to identify the mail on each pallet. Like bag and tray tags, pallet tags must indicate the destination and contents of the mailing, as well as the post office of mailing. You may choose to add additional information to the pallet label, such as batch number, entry point number, or pallet number.

The Pallet Summary Report analyzes the contents of each pallet in the mailing, and provides an overall summary of the mail by pallet, bag, and/or piece ID. This report is available in two formats: by rate and by destination (intra-SCF).



Files and Parameters

In addition to the parameters required for MailStream Plus to process your job, Palletization Plus requires some additional parameters. If you have not purchased Palletization Plus and attempt to use these parameters, MailStream Plus will abend.

Report Information File

Palletization Plus includes new information types for the report information file. This information may be included on the RP INF, EP INF, or BATINF parameters.

Use the Information Type field on these parameters to specify text for the pallet tag lines 1-9. These lines would be information types PLLIN1 - PLLIN9. An additional information type, PLLINB, will print one line of customized text in large-sized characters on the pallet tag. The actual text for these lines should appear in the Information Data field.

See Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide for additional information on using these parameters.

Report Requests File

The report parameters are stored in the report requests file. They are used to generate reports on the contents of the palletized mail. If you do not have Palletization Plus, you will not be able to produce these reports. More information about the palletization parameters can be found in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide.


Palletization Plus

Defining Palletization Plus Processing

Use the Presort Definition, Name/Address Record Posting, and Report Selection components to define pallet processing.

Invoking Palletization Plus for a Batch Job

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, type a 2 in front of Presort Definition.

2. Press ENTER; you will see the Presort Definition screen, UPCPPD10.

3. Press F10 to display the second Presort Definition screen, UPCPPD20.

4. Specify the Method for Postage Payment. Your choices are:

This field has no effect on Periodicals mailings.

5. Specify whether to apply the Intelligent Mail® Full Service (IMFS) discount to eligible pieces:

6. Define whether this is an Electronic Verification System (eVS®) Mailing. An eVS mailing applies

to IM® package Barcode mailings, only.

Value Definition

P or blank Mailpieces will have the mail permit imprint containing the bulk mailer’s permit number.

C Mailpieces will have pre-canceled stamps affixed to them.

M Mailpieces will have postage meter stamps affixed to them.

Option Definition

Y or F Full Service – This is an IMFS mailing. Verify the Service Type ID (STID). If the STID for the Full Service eligible mail piece is the NON-AUTO/Basic STID, then change the STID to the corresponding Full Service STID. Also, assign the Intelligent Mail® Full Service discount to the eligible mail pieces.

N, B, or blank

Basic – This is not an IMFS mailing. Verify the STID. If the STID for the mail piece is a Full Service STID, change the STID to the corresponding NON-AUTO/Basic STID.

X Do not verify the STIDs – Use the STID assigned without altering the STID.

Option Definition

Y Yes, this is an eVS mailing.

NOTE: In this case, “eVS” will be included in the banner text of the IM®pB. If MailStream Plus is creating the IM® package Barcode, the STID will be validated for eVS.

N or blank No, this is not an eVS mailing.



7. Define the type of palletization to perform. Put Y(es) or N(o) next to your choices:

• Automated Mail

• Machinable Mail

• Enh[anced] Carrier Mail

• Non-Auto[mation] Mail

8. On this same screen, specify Y(es) or N(o) on the following options:

• Perform SCF Reverse Presort

• Perform NDC Reverse Presort

• Mixed Containers on ASF/NDC Pallets?

• Allow undersized SCF Pallets

• Allow undersized ADC Pallets

• Allow undersized ASF/NDC Pallets

• Put Mixed Containers on SCF/NDC Pallets?

• Palletize Enhanced Carrier Mail

9. On this same screen, specify the Underweight Percent.

10. On this same screen, specify the Merged Allowable percentage.

11. On the same screen define the Undersized Entry Pallet minimum weight. The default is 100 pounds.

12. On this same screen, the minimum number of trays allowed for Undersized Entries.


Defining the Palletization Plus Output Fields

1. Put a 2 in front of Name/Address Record Posting.

You will see the Name/Address Record Posting screen.

2. Press F15 to define your output record palletization details on screen UPCPNA13.

3. Define the starting location in which to post the 9-byte Pallet Number (POSTLI).

4. Define the starting location in which to post the 5-byte pallet Labeling List Code (optional, POSTLI).

5. Press F12 to save your changes and return to the first view of the screen.


Defining the Palletization Plus Reports

1. Put a 2 in front of the Report Selection component and press ENTER to display Report screen UPCPRR11; press F10 to display the Report Selection screen, UPCPRS11.

2. Put 1s in front of the Pallet Tags, Pallet Summary, and Zone Summary Opt fields.

3. Press F6 to see the Pallet Summary definition screen.


Palletization Plus

4. In the Finest level of detail field, enter a code indicating the reporting level to include on your Pallet Summary Reports. Your choices are:

5. In the New page for each pallet field, enter a Y (yes) or N (no) to indicate whether to print a new page for each different pallet in your mailing.

6. In the Page & Cumulative Totals field, specify one of the following codes to indicate whether to print page and cumulative totals on your Pallet Summary report:

7. In the Print Format field, enter a code indicating the way you want information displayed on your report:

8. Using the table in the section entitled, Report Content and Appearance Definitions, specify your Pallet Tags report content.

9. Press F6 to display the Pallet Tags report screen, PPCRPT01.

Note that the Pallet Tags report definition screen is divided in two sections: Report content and appearance and Report Selection Criteria.

10. In the Create Pallet Label File field, enter a code indicating whether to create a pallet label file, pallet tags, or both. Your choices are:

Value Definition

PLT Report at the pallet level.

BAG Report at the bag level.

PID Report at the piece ID level.

Code Definition

Y or blank Yes, print the totals.

N No, do not print the totals.

Value Definition

I Intra-SCF

R By rate

blank Defaults to I for Periodicals; R for all other classes of mail.

Value Definition

Y Create the pallet label file.

N or blank Create pallet tags only; do not create the pallet label file.

B Create both the pallet tags and the pallet label file.


Chapter 11: Defining Optional ProcessingPalletization Plus Reports

11. In the Print Character field, specify one of the following codes to indicate the format of the large print lines:

12. If you specified C or X in the Print Character field, define your special (replacement) character in the Replacement Character field.

13. Using the table in the section entitled Report Content and Appearance Definitions, specify your report content and details.

14. In the Number of Tags per Pallet field, specify a number from 1 to 9.

15. Press F6 to accept your report definitions and return to the initial Report Selection screen, UPCPRS11. MailStream Plus includes the palletization reports in the list of defined reports.


You cannot generate Palletization Plus reports unless you purchased and installed the optional Palletization Plus product.

The reports specifically for Palletization Plus are:

• Pallet Summary Reports

• Palletization Tags report

The Pallet Summary Reports analyze the contents of each pallet in the mailing, and provide an overall summary of the mail by pallet, bag, bundle, and/or piece ID. This report is available in various formats.

Depending on the mailing requirements, the Pallet Tags Report can generate the Pallet tags required by the USPS to identify the mail on each pallet, or a data file that can be loaded into a Pallet Tag print program. Like bag and tray tags, pallet tags must indicate the destination and contents of the mailing, as well as the post office of mailing. You may choose to add additional information to the pallet label, such as batch number, entry point number, or pallet number.

These reports are described in the following pages. Please remember that these are sample reports only, and your reports may look different, depending on the options that you select and the contents of your mailing.

Value Definition

Y Use the actual characters to format the large print line.

N or blank Do not use the actual characters to format the large print line. Instead, construct characters using Xs and Os.

C Use the replacement character. The character may be any value except a space.

X Build the character from the replacement character. Replacement characters are limited to hexadecimal values: 00-FF.



Pallet Summary Report by Tray

The Pallet Summary Report displays an analysis of the contents of each pallet in the mailing, and provides an overall summary of the mail by pallet, bag, bundle, piece ID, and rate category.

Pallet Summary Report by Rate

The Pallet Summary Report by Rate shows the contents of the palletized and non-palletized portions of your mailing. The palletized portion is analyzed by individual pallet, while the non-palletized portion is analyzed by bag or bundle. For both portions, the report displays the:

• Destination of each pallet/bag by NDC and level (5-digit ZIP, 3-digit ZIP)

• Number of carrier presort pieces

• Number of 5-digit barcoded pieces

• Number of 3-digit barcoded pieces

• Number of non-barcoded presorted pieces

• Number of barcoded residual pieces

• Number of non-barcoded residual pieces

• Number of ADC/AADC barcoded pieces

• Number of MADC/MAADC barcoded pieces

• Total barcoded pieces

• Total number of copies

• Total weight of the pallet

Y in the position UW indicates that the pallet is underweight.

At the end of each section or page, the report displays a page total and a cumulative total in each category. Category totals are also calculated for the palletized portion, non-palletized portion, batch, and entry point

Pallet Tags Report

This report produces non-barcoded pallet tags that may be acceptable to use for some types of mailings. The PALLET TAGS report can also produce a data file that can be used as input to print IMb Pallet tags using appropriate Pitney Bowes Software applications.

To print customized information on your pallet tags, you need to specify report information on the RP INF parameters, using report information types and data PLLIN1 - PLLIN9. To increase the type size of the customized information, select PLLINB.

The Pallet Tags Report produces two copies of each tag by default because the DMM requires that each pallet be labelled on two adjacent sides. You may select from 1 to 9 tags to be produced.


Chapter 11: Defining Optional ProcessingManifest Reporting Plus

Manifest Reporting Plus

Manifest Reporting Plus is a licensed option. If you attempt to generate a Manifest Report, and are not licensed, the report will not run. Manifest Reporting Plus supports First-Class letters and flats and USPS Marketing Mail letters and flats.

The USPS Manifest Mailing System

The USPS developed the Manifest Mailing System (MMS) to facilitate the concept of reporting the postage needed on individual mailpieces that have differing postage amounts, rather than actually applying the postage amounts to the mailpieces. Publication 401 outlines the MMS guidelines to accept and verify mailings containing pieces that vary by weight or rate, but have the same class of mail and the same processing requirements.

Mailers whose mailpieces fit this description (invoices or statements of varying sizes, for example), enter into an agreement with their postmasters, allowing them to submit mail into the MMS. This agreement outlines the mailer’s responsibilities with regard to quality control, mail preparation, handling damaged pieces, and paperwork submitted with each mailing.

The USPS Manifest Mailing System allows mailers to print a postage fee document for all pieces in a mailing. This document, a manifest report, is a cross-reference to every piece in a mailing: the container in which the piece is held, the amount of postage for that piece, and whether the piece was “pulled” from the mailing. In short, the manifest must account for every mailpiece in a particular mailing. This method allows you to use postal imprint indicia rather than applying live postage (meter or stamps) to each mailpiece.

Complying with USPS Manifest Mailing System Requirements

The DMM states that, “the mailer must have an automated system that produces mail consistent with postal standards and calculates postage accurately...must also determine the qualifying presort level and...correct rate of postage for each piece...[and] assign a unique identification number to each piece.”

“Does this mean every piece?” you might ask. The answer: Yes, the USPS is quite serious about this. Even the pieces that are pulled from the mailing must be accounted for.



Handling Damaged and “Pulled” Mailpieces

During the assembly and inserter steps for a large mailing, some pieces are shredded by or become lodged within the equipment. These pulled pieces (also known as spoilage and withdrawn mail) are not forgotten: they must be removed from the mailing and processed separately.

In its Guide to the Manifest Mailing System (Publication 401), the USPS states: “You must adjust the manifest if mail that is reported on the manifest is damaged during processing and cannot be presented or if mail is withdrawn for any other reason.” If you are preparing a manifest mailing without the benefit of a manifest software application, you must do this by hand. This means that you will have to make the necessary manual corrections to your manifest report, and you must re-calculate the fees, weights, and totals on the report.

The manifest must match your mailing piece for piece.

MailStream Plus assigns the necessary manifest information to the name/address records in the MSNA00 (name/address processing) process. Manifest reports are generated during the report printing process (MSRP00).

You cannot use the Manifest Reporting Plus for Package Services or Periodicals mailings. MailStream Plus currently supports only First-Class and USPS Marketing Mail letters and flats.

Manifest Reporting Programs

If you purchased Manifest Reporting Plus, you received the following programs:

• MMNAMK00 — “Unlocking” program that allows you to run Manifest Reporting. Called by MSNA00 as a subroutine

• MMRPMR00 — Report program invoked by the REPORT MANIFEST parameter

Numbering Mailpieces

You must specify a starting piece number only if you are starting your unique piece numbering with some value other than 001. MailStream Plus generates the SERIAL parameter to define the starting value of the unique serial number within the key line that Manifest Reporting Plus uses to track mailpieces.

To define the SERIAL parameter:

1. Put a 2 in front of the Name/Address File Layout component; Press ENTER to display the Name/Address File Layout screen.

2. Page down to the Starting Sequence # field, and specify the number that MailStream Plus will use to start numbering your mailpieces.

3. Press F6 to save your report definitions and return to the Define/Submit Presort Job screen.


Chapter 11: Defining Optional ProcessingManifest Reporting Plus

Posting Output Key Line Components

POSTMK defines the output location to which MailStream Plus will post the Manifest key line and Manifest key line components. The key line components are:

• Mailpiece serial number

• Weight (prints for First-Class only)

• Rate category

• Postage paid

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, put a 2 by Name/Address Record Posting, and press ENTER.

2. Page down to the POSTMK fields.

3. Fill in the location(s) where you want the Manifest Keyline and/or other Manifest components to be posted into the name/address output records.

4. Press F6 to save your data posting selection(s). The key line shows up on a mailpiece or mailing label as follows:

Figure 1: Key line Example

So, when we talk about the manifest key line, we are talking about a single data string containing the manifest ID, piece weight increments, manifest rate, and per-piece postage. See the First-Class letter key line example (above) to see the correct placement for key line information.



Defining the Manifest Report

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, put a 2 on Name/Address Record Posting, and press <Enter>; page down to the POSTMK fields.

2. Fill in the location(s) where you want the Manifest Keyline and/or other Manifest components to be posted into the Name/Address output records.

3. Press F6 to save your data posting selection(s).

4. Put a 1 in front of the Manifest Report option; Press Enter to display the Manifest Report screen.

5. Specify the Manifest Report type: Select B for Batch Manifest or I for Itemized Manifest.

6. Specify a number between 10 and 999 for the Fixed Batch Manifest Override to produce a Fixed Batch Manifest. MailStream Plus uses a number to indicating the Fixed batch size.

If this position is left blank and there is a B in position 30, then MailStream Plus creates a Floating batch Manifest.

7. Optional: Tab to the report selection criteria area to select specific information for your Manifest report.

8. Press F6 to return to the initial Report Selection screen, UPCPRS11.

9. Press F12 to return to the Work with Reports screen.

10. Press F6 to save your report definitions.


Chapter 11: Defining Optional ProcessingHandling Multiple Records Per Address with RTYPES

Handling Multiple Records Per Address with RTYPES

Some files consist of more than one type of record for each name and address, such as a header record and none, one, or several trailer records used to produce an invoice. For example, if you are mailing a phone bill and your name and address file contains multiple records for each customer (for example, if each phone call for each customer is on a separate record), you would not want to process each record as a piece of mail. If you presented this name and address file to MailStream Plus as-is, MailStream Plus would treat each record as a separate piece of mail. However, you do not want to “lose” the additional records (trailer records) that are part of the customer bill (the phone calls he or she made over the last billing period).

RTYPES allows you to do this by extracting the header record, running those through the presorting process, and later matching the header records back to the trailer records. This process would produce the final output file in presorted order, with the header and trailer records matched to one another.

In order to accomplish this task, your input file must meet certain requirements:

• The first record of each set must contain the information required by MailStream Plus: ZIP Code and Carrier Route information, for example.

• The primary (first) segment must be distinguishable from the trailer segments by one of the following methods:

• All segments must contain an account number, and a change of account number will signal a change of logical record, or

• The first segment of each group must contain a code in a particular position that is not present in the trailer records. In this case, when the code is recognized, the segment will be treated as the start of a new logical record, or

• All trailing segments must contain a code in a position which is not present in the primary (first) segments. In this case, any record without the specified code will be considered the start of a new logical record.

Running a Job - RTYPES Overview

To do its job, RTYPES first invokes program MREX00 to place a key field on each header and each trailer record to help with re-sorting later in the process. The header records need to be sorted back into the order in which they were produced because they were reordered by MailStream Plus processing. MRAT00 then matches up header and trailer records by their respective key fields, and copies other sort data from the header into the trailer records. The merged name/address file will then be sorted into mailing sequence by the combination of the MailStream Plus final sequence number and the RTYPES control numbers.

Complete these steps to run RTYPES:

1. Use program MREX00 to extract the header records from your input file.

2. Perform a pre-defined process (MailStream Plus).

3. Use program MRATS1 to sort the headers in the order of the trailers.

4. Use program MRAT00 to merge the headers and trailers and copy control information from the headers to their respective trailers.



5. Use MRATS2 (or equivalent program) to sort the updated header/trailer pairs to their final output sequence. The following diagram shows how RTYPES fits in with the MailStream Plus workflow. You can use RTYPES with processes other than MailStream Plus, defining only the necessary processing parameters.

Figure 2: MailStream Plus and RTYPES

Program MREX00

MREX00 extracts the header records from any file containing header and trailer records. MREX00 splits the input file into three files: header records file, rejected records file, and trailer records file. You can then post information to the header record file through MailStream Plus.



Flow Chart and Description

The following diagram shows the processing flow of the MREX00 program.

Figure 3: MREX00 Overview

MREX00 receives a multiple record name/address file and writes the first record from each group to the header record file. Next, it writes the rest of the records to the trailer file.

All of the records for a name/address file must be grouped together on the input file. MREX00 may detect a change in a group by first detecting a change in a field (for example, an account number) or a field containing or lacking a value, such as a record type.

You may limit the number of records per group for RTYPES processing. If you specify a limit, RTYPES will collect records for a single group until it either reaches this limit, or until it reaches the end of a group. If RTYPES reaches the limit, you can either write the letters to a reject file, or drop them. This is useful when you want to gather all the one-ounce mail in one run, then run it again for mail in the two ounce category, and so on.

MREX00 appends a data area to the front of each record it writes to either the header or trailer file (not to the rejected records file). This field contains the group identification number and the group record sequence number. To accommodate this added field, RTYPES moves the original record to the right — it does not overwrite any existing data.

You must add 27 bytes to the FILEDF MREX00 parameter definition, and all references to your name/address records in MailStream Plus to account for the added RTYPES information. Note also that you cannot send invalid ZIP Codes to a Reject file when processing with RTYPES.



The header record must contain all of the information required to do the next processing step, whether it is MailStream Plus, or some other utility. In the case of MailStream Plus, this header record must contain at least a ZIP Code.

Program MRAT00

MRAT00 merges the header records extracted by program MREX00 with their respective trailer records, and copies certain data from the header records to their trailer records.

Flow Chart and Description

In the MailStream Plus step, do not send reject records to a separate file. MRAT00 has no way of re-attaching these records to the trailer records. The following diagram shows the processing flow of the MRAT00 program.

HINT: You may put the output from MailStream Plus into the first bytes of the header records so it will be copied to the trailer records.

MRAT00 reads each header record and header key field and matches these records to their respective trailer records. RTYPES copies header data from the location specified on the CONTRL parameter to the appended area of all records.

MRAT00 writes the records to the name/address output file. You then need to sort the records by the entire appended area to produce the final, sorted output.



Figure 4: MRAT00 Overview

Setting Up and Submitting an RTYPES Job

1. From the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, press F23 to enter the Card Edit screen.

2. Press F10 to add a new parameter.

3. Type RTYPES; Press Enter.

4. Enter the Distinguishing Flag Position and Length of the data to be looked at in the input name/address records.

5. Enter the Distinguishing Algorithm method.

6. Enter the Flag Comparand value to indicate a new logical record group.

7. Enter the maximum number of segments (records), if needed, allowed per group (headers and trailers).

8. If you enter a maximum number of segments, then you must enter the Disposition used for records that exceed the maximum.



9. Press F6 twice to save the RTYPES parameter.

To run RTYPES as part of your batch job:

1. From the Define and or Submit a Presort Job screen, put a 2 in front of Submit Batch Job; Press ENTER to display the Submit Batch Job screen UPCPSB01 (this is screen 1 of 3).

2. Put a 1 in front of the RTYPES Processing function, in the Opt field.

3. Press F6 to run your job with RTYPES processing.

4. Press F6 to save your definitions.


Chapter 11: Defining Optional ProcessingDuoSort™ Workshare Manager Processing

DuoSort™ Workshare Manager Processing

Worksharing is a term the USPS uses to describe how mailers can earn postage discounts. With worksharing, mailers do some of the work that the USPS typically performs, such as sorting and containerization (also known as “presorting”). In exchange for that work, the USPS offers discounted postage rates.

DuoSort extends the worksharing concept to preparing mail for machine presorting either at the mailer's own facility or at another location before that mail is given to the USPS. By doing some of the sorting in advance, mailers can save machine presorting operations time and money. The DuoSort Workshare Manager provides the ability to sort mail two different ways in a single processing step:

• Software presorting method – DuoSort uses MailStream Plus to presort mail so it can be submitted directly to the USPS and processed as a “bulk mailing.” Postage discounts are based on individual presort job qualification, and vary with each mailing.

• Machine presorting method – DuoSort prepares mail for presorting by a sorting machine such as an MLOCR (multiple line optical character reader). DuoSort can sort mail to be more efficiently processed by an in-house or out-sourced machine presorting operation. By sorting mail to the sort schemes used by the sorting machines, DuoSort enables most barcoded mail to be machine sorted in a single sort pass.

If you are a presort service bureau customer, you are probably looking for a way to reduce postage costs even further. By preparing mail so that your presort service bureau can process this mail in less time and at a lower cost, you may be able to negotiate service improvements or lower costs.

If you are using automated sorting equipment such as an MLOCR, you probably notice that the high-volume periods (end-of-quarter or end-of-year) can stretch your resources to the limit. DuoSort allows you to more efficiently use your sorting equipment to distribute the workload to outside vendors during these peak times, giving you more control over postage costs and resources.

If you use presort software and provide all of your mail to the USPS as bulk mailings, your jobs may contain a large volume of mail that is not qualifying for 3- or 5-digit automation discounts. When you turn over mail to a presort service bureau that does not qualify for optimal postage fees, the service bureau may be able to save you money on postage. Preparing that mail with DuoSort can both speed processing and provide some additional cost savings.

DuoSort Workshare Manager provides large-volume mailers with a tool that efficiently splits mailings into software-presorted (including manifested mailings) and machine-presorted mailings. Mailers who have a significant amount of mail that can qualify for 3-digit, or especially, 5-digit automation discounts can minimize postage by mailing that mail themselves using software to do the presort while machine presorting the remaining mail. This remaining mail can be commingled with mail from other jobs; or, if out-sourced, with mail from other mailers. To do this, mailers must run their addresses through a CASS™ coding product, such as the Pitney Bowes CODE-1 Plus, and must print high-quality and Delivery Point Barcodes on the mail.

Some presort service bureaus have multiple facilities, each serving a specific area. DuoSort not only separates mail by machine sort scheme but by presort facility as well. DuoSort creates separate transit documents for each presort facility, listing the number of pieces and trays for each sort scheme to be processed by that facility. The document totals the mail weight, by facility, for transportation planning purposes. This allows the presort service bureau to sort the mail using less



machine time and labor (some mailers may find that preparing mail for this process may take more time and labor). In exchange for worksharing, mailers may benefit through lower postage expenses or from faster mail transit and earlier delivery times.

Creating Trays of Mail for Machine Presorting

TIP: Group trays with the same sort scheme – either on a pallet or stackable pallet case – when turning mail over to the presorting service. This can require extra floor space and staging equipment.

When DuoSort prepares mail for machine presorting, it sorts this mail by sort scheme ID and puts the mail in that order. Mailers must create separate trays for each sort scheme ID and label them with that sort scheme number. MailStream Plus can mark the first or last piece of each tray as it would for mail presorted for the USPS, and mailers can use the same production techniques to create trays of mail for machine presorting. Mailers can use preprinted tray tags with Sort Scheme IDs or, if they own the MailStream Plus Bag Tag Option, they can print tray tags for both software-presorted and machine-presorted mail.

There are several workflow management techniques to efficiently separate mail by sort scheme. The Pitney Bowes Professional Services group can help.

Building trays of mail for machine sorting is a much easier process than that of creating trays of USPS-presorted mail where you must place specific mailpieces in each tray. As long as mailpieces for a specific sort scheme end up in any tray labeled for that sort scheme, the DuoSort processing will help. DuoSort processing allows mailers the flexibility of combining mail for a single sort scheme from multiple jobs into the same tray, minimizing the number of trays.

Who Benefits?

Need to offset rising postage costs? Commingling mail allows you to achieve the greatest postage discount “lift.” By using a combination of in-house and out-sourced machine presort operations, mailers can reduce postage expenses. Mailers who benefit most from DuoSort processing include:

• Mailiers using First-Class and USPS Marketing Mail , whose average mailings exceed 50,000 pieces each, but do not have sufficient ZIP Code density to achieve a high percentage of 5-digit Automation Rate discounts from a USPS-presorted mailing.

• Large-volume mailers who use presort service bureaus and are willing to do extra work to prepare mail for “single pass” machine presorting in exchange for either faster processing or lower processing costs. You must negotiate these benefits with your presort service bureau since the effect of this worksharing differs for each mailer.

• Mailers doing in-house machine presorting who are looking for a way to improve mail processing without sacrificing postage discounts. These mailers may improve efficiency by using outside presort services during peak mailing periods.



Sample User Scenarios

The following scenarios illustrate some instances in which DuoSort processing is beneficial.

I use an outside presort services company to presort my mail, but I do have the ability to do my own mailings in-house.

In this case, you can use DuoSort to prepare presort mailings for the portion of the mailing that qualifies for 5-digit automation-based discounts and better containerize the remaining mail according to the presort services company’s sort schemes.

Containerizing barcoded mail according to an external sort scheme dramatically improves the efficiency and speed of handling this mail by allowing it to skip the first machine sorting pass and route mail to multiple presorting facilities for more efficient transportation. The value of these efficiencies (for example, improved service or lower costs) varies with each mailer and must be negotiated with your presort services provider.

I use an in-house machine presort operation exclusively. Sometimes during the year, when mail volume spikes, we would like to be able to use some outside help. I don’t have a way to pre-process the mail for an outside processing house, so it would end up costing me lots of money to use someone else.

In this case, DuoSort has a number of benefits to help you handle volume peaks more efficiently. If you are able to do some bulk mail preparation yourself, you can prepare the mail that would earn the best discounts and present this mail directly to the USPS as a bulk mailing. This will keep your sorting equipment available for the mail that must be commingled to earn the best discounts. This also allows you to identify mail that is not getting good “lift” in your in-house sorting operation. You can then out source this mail to commingle with another company's mail, providing discounts you could not achieve from in-house processing alone.

Key Features

Include or exclude 3- or 5-digit ZIP Code ranges from the machine presort — This allows you to plan with your presort services company to internally process a mix of mail that is best for you and your presort services company.

Import sort schemes – Import sort schemes from files supplied by your presort services company and tailor those schemes to your own needs.

Set processing thresholds – You can use DuoSort to split First-Class or USPS Marketing Mail Letters into software-presorted and machine-presorted mailings based on rate-level thresholds.

Split machine presorted portions – You can split the machine-presorted portion of the mailing into Delivery Point Barcoded (DPBC) and non-DPBC groups.

Produce detailed transit documents – You can produce detailed transit documents for your presorting service bureau listing containers and container information, the number of pieces for each presort scheme, a summary of all the machine presorted mail, and the sort scheme details for each presort facility.



DuoSort Processing

This section describes the IBM® i screens that define DuoSort processing.

DuoSort Record Selection – UPCPD110

This optional definition allows you to include and exclude individual ZIP Codes and ranges of ZIP Codes for DuoSort processing. Access this screen from the Presort Definition component.

1. Type 2 or 6 in front of Presort Definition on the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen.

MailStream Plus displays the Presort Definition Screen, UPCPPD10.

2. Press F12 to display screen UPCPD110.

3. Define include/exclude parameters:

DuoSort Minimums – UPCPPD40

The add-a-name function details are also defined on screen UPCPPD40.

This optional field defines the minimum number of mailpieces allowed for each processing sort scheme. Access this screen from the Presort Definition component.



2. Page down to display screen UPCPPD40.

3. Define the Minimum Pieces per scheme field.

DuoSort Control Parameters – UPCPPD45

This required definition controls DuoSort processing. Access this screen from the Presort Definition component.

Field Description

Include/Exclude Specify I to include or E to exclude the 3-digit and 5-digit ZIP Codes to exclude.

3dg/5dg ZIP Codes Define 3-digit and 5-digit ZIP Codes to include or exclude from processing.

You may define ranges of ZIP Codes separated by the single-dash (-) character.

Note that 5-digit ZIP Codes take precedence over 3-digit ZIP Codes. If you exclude and exclude the same ZIP Codes or ZIP Code ranges, you will see a processing error.

Field Description

Minimum pieces per scheme Define the minimum number of pieces per scheme. This must be a value from 000001-999999, and must be padded with leading zeroes, if necessary.





2. Page down to screen UPCPPD45.

Field Description

Highest rate to keep in USPS sort

Discount Level None Specify one of the following 1-character codes to indicate the highest presort rate to keep as part of any USPS-presorted mailings with no defined discount level. There is no default value.

5 5-digit automated rate


A AADC/ADC automated rate

M MAADC/MADC automated rate

X All mail is machine-presorted. If carrier route processing is on, this setting takes precedence over DuoSort processing. Turn off carrier route sorting to sort all mailpieces with DuoSort.

Discount Level DNDC Specify one of the following 1-character codes to indicate the highest presort rate to keep as part of any USPS-presorted mailings at the DNDC discount level. There is no default value.






Discount Level DSCF Specify one of the following 1-character codes to indicate the highest presort rate to keep as part of any USPS-presorted mailings at the DSCF discount level. There is no default value.








Discount Level DDU Specify one of the following 1-character codes to indicate the highest presort rate to keep as part of any USPS-presorted mailings at the DDU discount level. There is no default value.






Handling Non-Automation Compatible Mail

Specify a 1-character code to define the handling of non-automation mail.

M Non-Automation Mail goes to the Machine Sort

U Non-Automation Mail goes to the USPS Sort

blank default (M)

Move Mailpieces > 1 oz to the non-barcoded Machine Sort? (1st Class)

Specify one of the following:

Y Yes, move mailpieces exceeding one ounce to the non-barcoded machine sort.

N No, keep the mailpieces exceeding one ounce to in the automation-compatible machine sort.

blank default (N)

Create separate trays for each ounce break in the Non-Barcoded machine sort? (1st Class)

Specify one of the following:

Y Yes, create separate trays for each one-ounce break; mailpieces 9 ounces and more are in the same group.

N No, do not create separate trays for each one-ounce break.

blank default (N)

Field Description



DuoSort Control Parameters – UPCPPD50

This required definition controls the placement of records that determine USPS® sorts and machine sorts (no default). Access this screen from the Presort Definition component.



2. Page down to screen UPCPPD50 (the last screen in this series).

DUO FILE Report Definition – UPCRDS01

This optional report writes machine sort mail counts to two *.csv (comma separated value) files. One file accounts for barcoded mail and the other file accounts for non-barcoded mail. Access this screen from the Presort Definition component.

1. Type 2 or 6 in front of Report Selection on the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen. MailStream Plus displays the Presort Definition screen, UPCPRR11.

2. Press F10 to display available reports. MailStream Plus displays the Report Selection screen, UPCPRS11.

3. Page down until you see the Duo File Report selection.

4. Type 1 next to Duo File Report; press Enter. MailStream Plus displays screen UPCRDS01.

Field Description

Force to USPS or Machine Sort M Force to the Machine Sort

U Force to the USPS Sort

Location of Flag to Check in input record

Input record location of the flag to check

Value to Check For If the flag location in the input record matches this value, the record is forced to the sort (USPS sort or Machine sort) specified in position 8.

NOTE: Specifying this parameter results in a “hard force.” This definition supersedes other DuoSort processing record placements, with one exception. That exception occurs when forcing a record to a machine sort that contains a ZIP Code and/or 3-digit ZIP Code that is not part of a DuoSort scheme. In that case, the record remains in the USPS portion of the Mailing.

Field Description

Replace Commas and Double Quotes

Specify:

Y Yes, replace these values with the value defined in the next field.

N No, do not replace these values.



DUOTRAN Report Definition – UPCRTR01

The optional DuoSort Workshare Manager Transit Document Report is the report that you give to the workshare facility/job shop that is processing your machine-presorted mail. Access this screen from the Presort Definition component.

1. Type 2 or 6 in front of Report Selection on the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen to display the Presort Definition screen, UPCPRR11.

2. Press F10 to display available reports to display the Report Selection screen, UPCPRS11.

3. Page down until you see the DuoTran Report selection.

4. Type 1 next to DuoTran Report; press Enter to display screen UPCRTS01.

5. Fill in the screen fields:.

Value to Replace Commas and Quotes

Define the value that will replace commas and double quotes. The default value is a blank space. You cannot use a comma or double quote in this field.

Copies, Auto Mail, Mach Mail, N-A Mail, A-C Mail, E-C Mail, Plt Mail, Carr Rate, P-S Rate, Res Mail, Mach Pre Mail

Common/global report fields: These fields are ignored for this report, except for 'Mach Pre Mail'. The Machine Presorted Mail level is on by default.

Field Description

Screen UPCRTS01 Fields

Field Description

Finest Level of Report Detail Define one of the following as the “finest” level to include on this report:

SCH Scheme

PSG Presort (Pitney Bowes Software/DuoSort)

BAT Batch level

FAC Facility level

blank Default is SCH

Reset Page Numbers and Totals Reset page number and totals at one of the following break points:

B Reset for each new batch.

F Reset for each new facility.

N Do not reset. Produce running totals and page numbers.

blank Default is F.

Copies, Auto Mail, Mach Mail, N-A Mail, A-C Mail, E-C Mail, Plt Mail, Carr Rate, P-S Rate, Res Mail, Mach Pre Mail

Common/global report fields: These fields are ignored for this report, except for Mach Mail: this is the default


Chapter 11: Defining Optional Processing

DFWorks® Processing

DFWorks® Processing

DFWorks® is an automated document factory with modules that support data collection, production

management, automation and reporting. DFWorks® supports:

• Production Workflow

• Postage Accounting and Funds Management

• Document Lifecycle Tracking

• Productivity Reporting

• Postal Manifesting

To learn more about DFWorks®, visit this link.

To define optional DFWorks® processing, start from the Presort Definition component, and page down to screen UPCPPD55.

This definition is valid for First-Class™ letters only.

This screen accommodates posting of the Pitney Bowes DFWorks® control field to output name/address records. Fill out the fields as follows:

Screen UPCPPD55 Fields


Location to Post the DFWorks® Control Field

Define the starting position and length of the posted 479-byte DFWorks®control field.

Origin of Host Sort ID Define the origin of the input host sort ID; must not be blank:

R The host ID is in the source record; “Location of Host Sort ID in record” and “Length of Host Sort ID in record” must be defined

I The host ID is defined by xx INF parameters; RP INF DFWHID is required

If R, Position of Host Sort ID in the Input Record

Define the starting position and length of the Origin Host Sort ID in the source record.

Origin of user-defined manifest

Define the origin of the user-defined manifest:

R The manifest originates from the record; Location and length definitions are required

I The manifest is define with RP INF DFWMUD

blank Use value specified by Host Sort ID

If R, Position of Manifest User Defined in the Input Record

Define the starting position and length of the user defined manifest in the source/input record.


http://www.pb.com/software/Print-and-Mail-Production/Automated-Document-Factory/DFWorks.shtml

Additional Optional Parameter Processing


Screen UPCRDEDT allows you to define processing parameters without individual CHUI screens. These parameters are:

Parameters Defined on the UPCRDEDT Screen (Part 1 of 2)

Parameter Description

ADDLBF Allows you to add more buffer space to perform name/address or statistics processing

ALG AU Allows you to indicate whether you are commingling your mail (for example, combining different rates on one pallet)

ALG BL (Formerly ALG PK) overrides the defaults that determine how MailStream Plus bundles the mail

ALG LV Defines the presort level for bundles and/or containers; container type(s); whether you will allow single-bundle trays, or overflow trays; presort subclass for this presort level

BG FRC Defines the pieces, bundles, weight, volume, and thickness to force a container for a specific container type

BG MAX Allows you to override the defaults governing the maximum weight, volume, and thickness of a container of mail

BG MIN Allows you to override the defaults governing the minimum number of pieces, minimum number of bundles, and the minimum weight, volume, and thickness for each container type

BL FRC Overrides the default settings and changes the number of mailpieces required to make a bundle

BL MAX Overrides the defaults governing the maximum size of a bundle of carrier, presort, or residual mail

CPYCNT Create multiple output name and address records from one input name/ address record based on the value in the copy count field.

E DESC Allows you to identify the location of the Entry Point Description Constant in the name/address file

EXITIN Activates routines that will assume processing control just after reading each record, before invoking MOVExx parameters, or before invoking stop/start ZIP Code comparisons

EXITOP Activates routines that will assume processing control just before each OPEN, WRITE, and CLOSE operation for specific sequential files

IN CTY Allows you to take advantage of in-county discounts for Periodicals mail

ML MIN Allows you to override the defaults governing the carrier route and 3/5-digit presort mailings

MOVE xx Specifies the destination, length, and source of data to be moved


Chapter 11: Defining Optional ProcessingAdditional Optional Parameter Processing

The following pages outline the steps necessary to define these parameters.

NDC SQ Allows you to reorder the processing of mail for different NDCs (Network Delivery Centers, formerly BMCs or Bulk Mail Centers)

PB FRC Overrides defaults to force a pallet

PB MAX Allows you to override the defaults governing the maximum size of a bundle of mail on a pallet

PL LVL Allows you to specify whether you want to make a pallet for each level and subtype of your sortation

POSTIJ Indicate where to post the Mailer's Choice inkjet file information in the name/address file or to a separate file

QP AMT Allows you to change the qualifying amounts for bundles on pallets defined for a particular presort level

R FLAG Allows you to define residential name/address records

RENMBR Overrides the default to specify pallet and bag/tray numbers

RTYPES Allows you to place a key field on each header and each trailer record to help with re-sorting later in the process by invoking the MREX00 program

SCF SQ Allows you to change the sortation sequences of SCF codes

SRTFLD Specifies the sort key for the final sort of the name/address records and some MailStream Plus reports

SRTFLn Specifies the sort key for the final sort of the name/address records and some MailStream Plus reports

TABLSZ Allows you to override the internal table sizes (batch code, entry point, piece attributes, list codes, or statements of mailing/summaries) with a table you specify.

Parameters Defined on the UPCRDEDT Screen (Part 2 of 2)




Step-by-Step

To define some optional processing functions:

1. Press F23 on the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen.

You will see the UPCRDEDT (parameter edit) screen.

UPCRDEDT Global Card Image Editor Job MYJOB Select Card Image to be Maintained Rls

'2' to Edit F3=Exit without Update F6=Update F10=Add Print


Chapter 11: Defining Optional ProcessingAdditional Optional Parameter Processing

2. Press F10 to define an additional parameter. MailStream Plus changes the appearance of the screen, adding a window.

3. Under the Enter card type to be added line, type the name of the parameter you wish to define.

UPCRDEDT Global Card Image Editor Job MYJOB Select Card Image to be Maintained Rls

.................................. : : : Enter card type to be added: : : ALG AU : : : : : : : :................................:

'2' to Edit F3=Exit without Update F6=Update F10=Add Print

MailStream Plus adds this dialog



4. Press ENTER to display an 80-position parameter line. You will use this line to define your parameter details.

Each parameter definition screen varies according to the specific parameter you are defining. Use the individual parameter layouts in Chapter 1 of the MailStream Plus Reference Guide to define your processing details.

For this parameter, you would specify the Commingling Indicator — Specify an option indicating whether to commingle mail on pallets

5. Press F6 to save the current parameter definition.

MailStream Plus returns you to the initial UPCRDEDT screen. You will see the currently defined parameters listed on this screen. You can go back and edit any of the defined parameters by entering a 2 in front of a parameter and pressing ENTER.

UPCRDEDT Global Card Image Editor Job MYJOB Rls

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890A [ALG AU] (Indicate if mail is commingled) A = Commingling indicator Y = Yes, commingle mailings on pallets N = No, do not commingle mailings on pallets blank = Defaults to Y

F6=Update F12=Return PRINT


12
System-Wide Commands
Entering Commands at the Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Run MailStream Plus Jobs with UPRUNJOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Submit MailStream Plus Jobs with UPSBMJOB . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Using the Job Import Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Example: Creating a Job that Uses an Existing Library . . . . . .248 Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Entering Commands at the Command Line


From a command line, you can enter the following commands to run or submit a MailStream Plus job:

• UPRUNJOB – Runs the job interactively

• UPSBMJOB – Submits the job to run in batch mode

When you enter the UPRUNJOB or UPSBMJOB commands, you have two options.

• Type the command and then press F4 for a screen prompting you for the input name/address file, library, and member, as well as processing limitations.

– Or –

• Type the command and the Job ID of the job you want to run or submit, and then press ENTER to run or submit the job with the same name/address file and other parameters that you used last time this job was submitted.

In addition to entering these commands at the system prompt, you can include them in your control language (CL) programs to submit several jobs in succession.

For your system to recognize these commands, your library list must contain the MailStream Plus library (default G1MSPGMS) and the Global library (default G1@@PGMS). The libraries for other products should not be in the library list.

Run MailStream Plus Jobs with UPRUNJOB

UPRUNJOB (MailStream Plus Run Job) is an optional command that executes a MailStream Plus job interactively, from a command line, or from within a control language program. You can use UPRUNJOB in a job stream to run jobs in a specific order. The library list must contain the MailStream Plus library before UPRUNJOB can be executed. Use command ADDLIBLE G1MSPGMS to accomplish this.

Substitute the name of your MailStream Plus library for "G1MSPGMS," if necessary.

The fields on the UPRUNJOB command reflect the field values that are available through the job submission function screens. Value *SAME means that the last values on those screens will be used. The values typed on this command do not replace the defined values on the Submit MailStream Plus Job screens.

1. To execute the UPRUNJOB command interactively, place your cursor on the command line.


Chapter 12: System-Wide CommandsEntering Commands at the Command Line

2. Type UPRUNJOB, and press F4.

You will see the following screen:

The initial UPRUNJOB screen displays three columns.

• The first column lists the field and parameter selections available in UPRUNJOB.

• The second column provides entry fields for all parameter definitions.

• The third column lists all valid values or valid value types for each field.

You may press F11 to display the keywords for your parameter selections. The keywords provide an alternative method of typing commands and parameters.

3. Complete the entries on this screen. When you use UPRUNJOB:

• You must specify the Job ID to execute.

• If you specify *SAME for any output file, library, member name, or exit routine name, MailStream Plus uses either the value specified in your most recent job submission or uses the default values.

Run MailStream Plus Job (UPRUNJOB)

Type choices, press Enter.

Job ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . Character value Database Library . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME RTYPES Processing? . . . . . . . Y, N Generate Statistics Records? . . Y, N Run Presort? . . . . . . . . . . Y, N Post Name/Address Record? . . . Y, N Print Reports? . . . . . . . . . Y, N Input N/A File . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Library . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME, *NONE Output N/A File . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Library . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME, *NONE Output N/A Record Length . . . . 0 Number Create Rejects File? . . . . . . Y, N Output Rejects File . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Library . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME More...

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys



4. Page down to see additional UPRUNJOB selections.

5. Using the guidelines for defining the options on the previous screen, complete the entries on the second screen.

6. Press ENTER to run your job using your specified parameters.

Submit MailStream Plus Jobs with UPSBMJOB

UPSBMJOB (MailStream Plus Submit Job) is an optional command that submits a MailStream Plus job for batch processing from the command line or from within a control language program. You can use UPSBMJOB in a job stream to submit jobs in a specific order. The library list must contain the MailStream Plus library before UPSBMJOB can be executed. Use command ADDLIBLE G1MSPGMS to accomplish this.

Substitute the name of your MailStream Plus library for "G1MSPGMS," if necessary.

The fields on the UPSBMJOB command reflect the field values that are available through the job submission function screens. Value *SAME means that the last values on those screens will be used. The values typed on this command, however, will not replace the values on the Submit MailStream Plus Job screens.

The Submit Job command is similar to the Run Job command (UPRUNJOB), with the addition of the job description, job name, and hold on queue parameters.

To run the UPSBMJOB command interactively, your cursor must be positioned on a command entry line.

Run MailStream Plus Job (UPRUNJOB) Type choices, press Enter.

Output Rejects File . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Library . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME, *NONE Input Bank File . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Library . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME, *NONE Create Name Record Ctl File? . . Y, N Create Fixed Len MSBAR/MSTRA? . Y, N Crt Fixed Len Mail.dat Files? . Y, N Mail.dat IFS Filename . . . . . Character value Copy Mail.dat Files to IFS? . . Y, N Crt Fixed Len SSF File? . . . . Y, N Copy SSF File to IFS? . . . . . Y, N Delete Output N/A File bf Run? Y, N

Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys


Chapter 12: System-Wide CommandsEntering Commands at the Command Line

1. Type UPSBMJOB in the command entry line. Press F4. You will see this screen:

The initial UPSBMJOB screen displays three columns.

• The first column lists the field and parameter selections available in UPSBMJOB.

• The second column provides entry fields for all parameter definitions

• The third column lists all valid values or valid value types for each field.

You may press F11 to display the keywords for your parameter selections. The keywords provide an alternative method of typing commands and parameters.

2. Complete the entries on this screen. When you use UPSBMJOB:

• You must specify the Job ID.

• The library list must contain the MailStream Plus library before UPSBMJOB can be executed using command ADDLIBLE. The fields on the UPSBMJOB command reflect the field values that are available through the job submission function screens.

Submit MailStream Plus Job (UPSBMJOB)


Job ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . Character value Database Library . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME RTYPES Processing? . . . . . . . Y, N Generate Statistics Records? . . Y, N Run Presort? . . . . . . . . . . Y, N Post Name/Address Record? . . . Y, N Print Reports? . . . . . . . . . Y, N Input N/A File . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Library . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME, *NONE Output N/A File . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Library . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME, *NONE Output N/A Record Length . . . . 0 Number Create Rejects File? . . . . . . Y, N Output Rejects File . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Library . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME More...




3. Page down to see the next Submit MailStream Plus Job screen.

4. Using the guidelines for completing the previous screen, complete the entries on the second screen.

5. Press ENTER to submit your job to batch using your specified parameters.

Submit MailStream Plus Job (UPSBMJOB)


Output Rejects File . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Library . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAMEMember . . . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME, *NONE Input Bank File . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Library . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Name, *SAME, *NONE Create Name Record Ctl File? . . Y, N Create Fixed Len MSBAR/MSTRA? . Y, N Crt Fixed Len Mail.dat Files? . Y, N Mail.dat IFS Filename . . . . . Character value Copy Mail.dat Files to IFS? . . Y, N Crt Fixed Len SSF File? . . . . Y, N Copy SSF File to IFS? . . . . . Y, N Delete Output N/A File bf Run? Y, N

Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys


Chapter 12: System-Wide CommandsUsing the Job Import Utility

Using the Job Import Utility

Use the Job Import Utility to create a ready-to-run job from a flat parameter file and parameters specified on the import command. To use the Job Import Utility, follow these steps:

1. Add the product installation and global library to your library list.

Use the ADDLIBLE or EDTLIBL command.Example: ADDLIBLE LIB(G1MSPGMS) and ADDLIBLE LIB(G1@@PGMS).

2. Ensure that the job does not already exist.

• Call G1MM01.

• Select option 1: MailStream Plus.

• Verify that the job does not appear in the list.

3. Create a file to hold the job parameters to be imported using the create source file command: Example: CRTSRCPF FILE(MYLIB/PARMFILE) RCDLEN(92)

The file must have a record length of 92.

You may also use an existing source file.

4. FTP the job parameters into the source file using your preferred method.

You will FTP the parameter file from the source platform (Windows or Unix, for example) into a new or existing member of the source physical file created in step 3.

Some FTP clients cannot send parameters directly to a source physical file. In these cases, create an 80-byte file and FTP the parameter file into that file. Copy the file containing the 80-byte parameter file to the source physical file, using the CPYF command, with parameter option FMTOPT(*CVTSRC).



5. Import the job using this command: IMPJOBMSP, then press F4.

6. Fill out the following entries on the Import Job screen:

Other variables on the Submit Batch Job screens are set to their default values, including job description and output file names.

Import Mailstream Plus Job (IMPJOBMSP)


Parm Input File Name . . . . . . Name Library . . . . . . . . . . . Name Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name, *FIRST Job ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . Character value Job Work Library . . . . . . . . Name Create Work Library? . . . . . . N Y, N Database Library . . . . . . . . Name Job Input N/A File Name . . . . Name Library . . . . . . . . . . . Name Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name, *FIRST Job Bank File Name . . . . . . . Name Library . . . . . . . . . . . Name Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name, *FIRST

Bottom



[Parameter] Input File Name/Library/Member

Source physical file that you created in step 3 and member you FTP'd the parameters into in step 4

Job ID Name of the job you want to create: A Job ID may be from one to five characters in length. The characters may be A-Z, 0-9, or special characters $, @, #, or _. Embedded blanks are not permitted.

Job Work Library Name of the library where the IBM® i parameter file will be created

Create Work Library Specify whether to create the Job Work Library if it does not already exist. If library does not exist but Create Work Library was not specified, the program will fail with CPF9810.

Job Input N/A File Name/Library/Member In the created job, this is the default input file name on the job submission screen. Specify it here because there is no parameter to define it.

Job Bank File Name/Library/Member In the created job, this will be the default bank input file name on the job submission screen. Specify it here because there is no parameter to define it.


Chapter 12: System-Wide CommandsUsing the Job Import Utility

7. Verify the results using the command WRKMBRPDM MSWORKLIB/PRMMSjobid.

8. Review the following members by specifying option 5=Display:

Parameters that are commented out with a leading “*” (asterisk) or “* “ (asterisk+space) are sorted to the appropriate member, but are not otherwise processed.

Import Mailstream Plus Job (IMPJOBMSP)

Work with Members Using PDM MDG1I7DV File . . . . . . PRMMSDEMO Library . . . . MSWORKLIB Position to . . . . . Type options, press Enter. 2=Edit 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 6=Print 7=Rename 8=Display description 9=Save 13=Change text 14=Compile 15=Create module... Opt Member Type Text @@GLB 850@@GLB Parameters @@PAT 250@@PAT Parameters @@PDF 500@@PDF Parameters @@PXT 200@@PXT Parameters IGNORED Recognized but ignored parameters M3PRM 625M3PRM Parameters NAPRM 600NAPRM Parameters ORIGINAL Copy of the parms being imported More... Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Create F9=Retrieve F10=Command entry F23=More options F24=More keys

(C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1981, 2007.

Parameter Member Description

IGNORED Parameters that were recognized, but not otherwise processed, such as TESTIT and CHCKPT.

ORIGINAL Copy of the complete list of parameters being imported, as specified in step 5

PROCESSED Parameters that were imported, but that do not appear in any parameter member, such as parameters that are specified on the “Submit Batch Job” screens. For example: FILEDF, DB LIB, BYPEXP, AUXIL1, and EXITOP, and so on. The values on those parameters will appear on the “Submit Batch Job” screens.

UNKNOWN Parameters that were ignored because their names were unrecognized.

Other members Contain the imported, sorted-out parameters used by the application.



9. Run the job.

• Verify that the job now exists and is ready to run with no modifications.

– CALL G1MM01

– Select option 1: MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System.

– The Last Activity displayed on the Work with Jobs screen will show as “Import Job”

• On the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, the values listed under Last Activity indicate the date and time the job was imported, and will show user IMPJOBMSP.

Example: Creating a Job that Uses an Existing Library

This section describes the steps to create a job named DEMO with a work library of MSWORKLIB. This job:

• Uses a product install library of G1MSPGMS

• Uses parameters that were FTP'd into file MYLIB/PARMFILE member PARMMBR

• Assumes library MYLIB already exists

1. Run the commands ADDLIBLE LIB(G1MSPGMS) and ADDLIBLE LIB(G1@@PGMS).

2. CALL G1MM01.

3. Select option 1: MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System.

4. Verify that the job does not appear in the list.

5. Run the command CRTSRCPF FILE(MYLIB/PARMFILE) RCDLEN(92).

6. FTP parameters into MYLIB/PARMFILE member PARMMBR.

7. Run the command IMPJOBMSP INPPRMFIL(MYLIB/PARMFILE) INPPRMMBR(PARMMBR) JOBID(DEMO) WORKLIB(MSWORKLIB) CRTWRKLIB(N) INPNAFIL(MYNALIB/MYNAFILE)

INPNAMBR(*FIRST).

8. Run the command WRKMBRPDM MSWORKLIB/PRMMSDEMO, and use option 5 to display the contents of the members.

9. Run the job.

• CALL G1MM01 and select option 1: MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System.

• Use option 16 next to job “DEMO," or use the commands UPRUNJOB or UPSBMJOB to run or submit the job: UPRUNJOB JOBID(DEMO)

Error Messages

IMPJOBMSP may return the following escape messages:

• MP0100: Job already exists

• All CHKOBJ escape messages, including:

• CPF9810: Library xxxxxxxxxx not found

• CPF9801: Object xxxxxxxxxx in library xxxxxxxxxx not found (file not found)

• CPF9815: Member xxxxxxxxxx file xxxxxxxxxx in library xxxxxxxxxx not found


Index

Symbols

.ccr (Component Characteristic Record file) 187

.cpt (Component file) 187

.cqt (Container Quantity file) 188

.csm (Container Summary file) 188

.hdr (Header file) 188

.icr (InkJet file) 188

.mcr (mailpiece unit/component relationship) 188

.mpa (Mailer Postage Account) 188

.mpu (Mailpiece Unit file) 188

.pbc (Piece Barcode Record File) 188

.pdr (Piece Detail file) 188

.pqt (Package Quantity file) 188

.seg (Segment file) 188

.sfb (special fee barcode file) 188

.sfr (special fees/charges file) 188

.snr (mail.dat seed file name)S CODE and name/address file location 197

.snr (seed name file) 188

.wsr (walk-sequence file) 188

A

add processing buffer space 234additional buffer space 238ADDLBF parameter, defining 234adjusting parameter record definitions for RTYPES 221ALG AU parameter, defining 234ALG BL parameter, defining 234ALG LV parameter, defining 234assign bags and/or packages to pallets 208automation

compatibilitypresorting parameter records, specifying 74

flatsdefining 125, 130

B

Bag Tag/Tray Tag Option (product add-on) 20–21

bag tagsreport, defining 111

barcoded mailcontainerizing 227

basic job information 16class of mail 16control language 16file description 16file format, defining 16file layout 16height 16length 16percent of advertising (Periodicals mail) 16thickness 16type of mail 16weight 16

batch codesdefining 55

batch jobrunning 99setting up 92

BATINF parameter record 209benefits

First-Class and USPS Marketing Mail 226offset rising postage costs 226to large-volume mailers 225to presort service bureau customers 225

BG FRC parameter, defining 234BG MAX parameter, defining 234BG MIN parameter, defining 234BL FRC parameter, defining 234BL MAX parameter, defining 234Bound printed matter

defining 140buffer space, add for processing 234building mail trays for machine sorting 226bulk mailings, using DuoSort Workshare Manager to prepare 225bundle

report for Periodicals (USPSBNDL)


selecting optional reports 22bundle force settings, override 234bundle maximums, overriding 234bundling defaults, override 234

C

carrier routeWalk-Sequence Report (REPORT

CRRTWALK)selecting optional reports 20

CASS™ 225Certificate Authority

defining 155Certificate Authority file

defining file path 155change the qualifying amounts for bundles on pallets 235change the sortation sequences of SCF codes 235class of mail

Package ServicesManifest Reporting Plus 216

PeriodicalsManifest Reporting Plus 216

comminglingmail 234

complying with the Manifest Mailing System 215container minimum quantities, overriding 234Container Number, location to post 233Container Tags Report (REPORT CONTTAGS)

selecting optional reports 20containerizing barcoded mail 227Containers

location to post the container number 233containers, forcing 234containers, overriding defaults 234creating

trays of mail for machine presorting 226creating your first MailStream Plus job 24–27Customized MarketMail™ 60

D

damaged and “pulled” mail pieces 216Defaults for Print Output screens

UPCPPX01function keys 33

defaults to force pallets, override 235Define Headers and Footers Screen (UPCPPX03)

function keys 34define residential name/address records 235Defining

parameter options

path to Certificate Authority file 155defining

automation flats 125, 130automation postcards 123batch codes 55bound printed matter mailings 140enhanced carrier route manual letters 137entry point codes 63firm bundling 53inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode details 159machinable presorted letters 133mailing piece attributes 35name/address file layout 46–56optional processing 186–238outbound Intelligent Mail® barcode details 158output files 83–89Palletization Plus processing 210parameter record options

bag/tray numbers 235presorted flats 136presorted parcels 128presorts ??–81report information variables 105, 205reports

basics 104SCF drop shipments 143selection criteria for reports 108

defining input exit routines 234defining output exit routines 234Detail Statistics Report (DETAIL)

selecting optional reports 21DFWorks® processing 233discounts

defining 58eligibility, specifying 61

Domestic Mail Manual (DMM) 60DRPKEY Report Information (RP INF) Subkeyword 149DuoSort Workshare Manager

key features 227preparing bulk mailings with 225transportation planning 225user scenario samples 227using MLOCR equipment with 225

E

enhancedcarrier route/Manual letters, defining 137

Entry point 16code, defining 61, 63

EP INF parameter record 209exclude


3- or 5-digit ZIP Code ranges 227EXITIN parameter

SEQCHK parameter 56EXITIN parameter, defining 234EXITOP parameter, defining 234

F

features of DuoSort Workshare Manager 227files

and parameter records, Palletization Plus 209created for MailStream Plus jobs 29

final sort key 235Firm bundles

minimum quantity 54firm bundling, defining 53First-Class

examples 123–129fixed batch manifest 218floating batch manifest 218footers and headers

types 35force a container 234FRM BL parameter record

field nameLocation of Firm Bundling Comparand Field

54Minimum Quantity for Firm Bundle 54

G

generate statistics record 93

H

headers and footerstypes 35

I

IBM® i parameter record members 27Idealliance

control of Mail.dat 187import sort schemes 227inbound Intelligent Mail® barcodes 159include

3- or 5-digit ZIP Code ranges 227in-county discounts for Periodicals mail 234in-house machine presorting, benefits to mailers 226InkJet File 188input

carrier sequence 69file format 16record

what MailStream Plus needs to know 16input exit routines, defining 234Intelligent Mail barcode

defining firm name for outbound Intelligent Mail barcode 155

defining parsed personal name for outbound Intelligent Mail barcode 155

Intelligent Mail® barcode 174define

control flag and creation 174inbound 159inbound ZIP Code 165outbound barcode details 158

IMBSER 156IP IMB 155ML 360 155Web Service port number 161

internal table sizes, override 235introducing MailStream Plus/Palletization Plus 7IP IMB parameter record 155, 161

field name 161Intelligent Mail® barcode Web Service

Domain Name or Address 161

J

jobcomponents, accessing 17details, specifying 94preparing 16

K

keyline example 217

L

large-volume mailers, benefits to 225–226Line of Travel (LOT) presorts 137Location of Firm Bundling Comparand Field field name

FRM BL parameter record 54

M

machinable mail 133presorted letters, defining 133

machine sorting 225building mail trays for 226

mailclass

defining 58how MailStream Plus helps you prepare it 8paying the postage 66

Mail Content Audit Trail Report (REPORT


AUDITTRL) 112selecting optional reports 20

mail typedefining 58

mail volumehandling spikes in 227

Mail.datfile naming 189file naming for electronic transfer 189files 187Mail.dat files and summary report (MAILDAT)

selecting optional reports 21obtaining User License ID’s for 187, 189report selection criteria definitions 200using 187–206

MAIL360 13, 17, 165Data Manager 166–167defining inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode ZIP

Code 165Intelligent Mail® barcode

Web Service domain name or address 161Web Service port number, IP IMB

parameter record 161Intelligent Mail® barcode Web Service port

number 161Mailer ID Policy field name, ML 360 parameter

record 157ML 360 parameter record 157numbering engine defined 157partition ID field name, ML 360 parameter

record 157Mailer ID 173

policy, ML 360 parameter record 157Mailer's Choice 235Mailer’s Choice 21

and LABLN 89and POSTNS 89barcoded tag file 29inkjet file 29

MailStream Pluscreating your first job 24–27files created for AS/400 jobs 29IBM® i parameter files 27jobs, general 15–22MailStream Plus/Palletization Plus components

9output files, the basics 84reports 20Statistical Report (RUNSTATS)

selecting optional reports 21what is it? 8

make a pallet for each level 235Manifest Mailing System

compliance 215definition 215

Manifest report(MANIFEST)

selecting optional reports 21handling damaged and “pulled” mail pieces 216keyline example 217POST MK parameter record 217programs 216

MMNAMK00 216MSRPMR00 216

SERIAL parameter record 216Minimum Quantity for Firm Bundle field name

FRM BL parameter record 54ML 360 parameter record 155

field nameMailer ID Policy 157Numbering Engine 157Partition ID 157

ML MIN parameter, defining 234MLOCR, using with DuoSort 225MOVE xx parameter, defining 234MOVExx parameter

SEQCHK parameter 56MRAT00 program

graphical illustration 223RTYPES 222RTYPES overview 219

MRATS1 programRTYPES overview 219

MRATS2 programRTYPES overview 220

MREX00 program 235RTYPES overview 219

multiple line optical character reader (MLOCR) 225

N

name/address filelayout, defining 45–56

NDC SQ parameter, defining 235Network Delivery Center (NDC)

formerly BMC - using pallets 208

O

optionaloutput fields, defining 85parameter record processing, defining 234processing choices 186reports 20

outputfile requirements


component 187component characteristic 187container quantity file 188Container Summary file 188Header file 188mailpiece unit file 188mailpiece unit/component relationship 188Package Quantity file 188seed name file 188segment file 188special fees/charges file 188un-coded parcels address file 188walk-sequence file 188

filesdefining 83–89

recordsposting 93

reviewing 100output exit routines, defining 234Outside County processing 22override bundle force settings 234override bundle maximums 234override bundling defaults 234override container defaults 234override container minimums 234override defaults to force pallets 235override minimums for carrier route, and 3-5-digit presorted mailings 234override the defaults governing the maximum size of a bundle of mail on a pallet 235override the internal table sizes 235overriding presort options 69

P

Package Servicesexample 140examples for setting up jobs 140manifest reporting prohibition 216

pallet qualifying amounts, changing 235Pallet Tags Report (PALTAGS)

selecting optional reports 21Palletization Plus 207

files and parameter records 209how it works 208invoking 67output fields, defining 211overview 207Pallet Summary Report by Rate 214processing, defining 210report information file 209report samples 213reports 208

Pallet Summary Report 208, 213Pallet tags 208

reports, defining 211what is it? 9

palletizing mailassigning bags and/or packages to pallets 208basic sortation 207DMM regulations 208pallet label 207

palletsdefinition of 207

parameter record(parm) test, running 97defined 12edit screen 236files

report information file 209report requests file 209

functions 18general 18–19IBM® i parameter files 19POST MK 217RP INF 214SERIAL 216settings, general 18verification program 186viewing for your job 101

partition IDML 360 parameter record 157

paying postage on a mailing 66PB FRC parameter, defining 235PB MAX parameter, defining 235Periodicals

examples 130examples for setting up jobs 130Mail Container Report (USPSBNDL)

selecting optional reports 22manifest reporting prohibition 216ride-along pieces in mailing 132

piece attributes, defining 35piece barcode record file 188Piece detail record

file, why it’s useful 202Pitney Bowes Software

professional services group 226PL LVL parameter, defining 235post output records 93postage, paying 66postcards

defining automation postcards 123POSTCI parameter

field nameLocation to Post the Container Number 233


POSTMK parameter record 217PRDDTA parameter 168presort

defining 57–81defining flats 136defining parcels 128definition

overriding options 69definition screens

UPCPPD10 104Presort Definition Screens

UPCPPD10 46Presort Verification Report (PRESVFY)

selecting optional reports 21running 93

presort level for bundles and/or containers 234presort service bureau customers, benefits to 225presorted flats, defining 136printing reports 93processing

defining 185–238options 186

produce Inkjet Container file (ICR) 201produce Special Fees/Charges Record (SSF) 202producing reports

detailed transit documents 227DuoSort Workshare Manager Transit Document

Report 232provider code

see user license IDpulled mail pieces 216

Q

QP AMT parameter, defining 235qualify SCFs

as entry points 143default SCF Code is not from DMM Section

L005 (example) 148no default (example) 148SCF from DMM section L005 is the default

(example) 148

R

R FLAG parameter, defining 235RECPNT parameter 168RENMBR parameter, defining 235Reorder the processing of mail for different NDCs 235Reports

DuoSort Workshare Manager Transit Document Report 232

reportsbasics 104Control Totals 104defining report information 209Execution Log 104information file, Palletization Plus 209information variables, defining 105, 205optional 20Palletization Plus 208Parameter Record List 104printing 93REPORT AUDITTRL 20REPORT BAGTAGS 20REPORT CONTTAGS 20REPORT CRRTWALK 20REPORT DETAIL 21REPORT FACESLIP 21REPORT MAILDAT 21REPORT MANIFEST 21REPORT PALSUMM 21REPORT PALTAGS 21REPORT PRESVFY (Presort Verification

Report) 21REPORT RUNSTATS 21REPORT SUMMARY 21REPORT TRAYTAGS 21REPORT USPSBNDL 22REPORT USPSCONT 22REPORT USPSSTMT 22REPORT ZONESUMM 22REPORT ZSDETAIL 22selecting those to print 107

residential records, defining 235reverse presorting

defining a reverse presort job 117what is it? 116

reviewing job output 100ride-along pieces in a Periodical mailing 122, 132RP INF parameter record 104, 209RTYPES

modifying parameter record definitions for 221MRAT00 program 222MREX00 program 220overview 219processing 94running a Job 219

RTYPES parameter, defining 235running

a presort, instructions to 93batch jobs 99parameter (parm) test 97


S

samplessample user scenarios 227

SCF codes, change sortation of 235SCF SQ parameter, defining 235Sectional Center Facility (SCF)

drop shipment examples 143, 148qualifying all as entry points 143using pallets 208

selecting reports to print 107selection criteria

defining for reports 108definitions for Mail.dat 200

SEQCHK parameterfield name

Sequence Error Treatment 56Sequence Field Segment Locations 56

Sequence Error Treatment field nameSEQCHK parameter 56

Sequence errors, fixing 56Sequence Field Segment Locations field name

SEQCHK parameter 56SERIAL parameter record 216set processing thresholds 227setting up a batch job 92skid

see pallet, definition of 207software presorting 225sort key the final sort of the name/address records 235special presorts you can do with MailStream Plus 116splitting your mailing 227spoilage 216SRTFLD parameter, defining 235SRTFLn parameter, defining 235SRVFEE parameter 172starting serial number (MAIL360 processing) 173statistics records, generating 93system requirements 17

T

TABLSZ parameter, defining 235transportation planning with DuoSort 225trays

creating for machine presort 226types of headers and footers 35

U

UPCPPD10 - Presort Definition screenfunction keys 59, 105, 108

UPCRDEDT 234UPCRDEDT parameter record edit screen 236UPRUNJOB

command 240Run jobs screen 240

UPSBMJOB - Submitting Jobs screen 242user license ID

obtaining from IDEAlliance 187obtaining from Idealliance 187

using Mail.dat 187–206USPS Marketing Mail

benefits 226examples for setting up jobs 133

USPS®Manifest Mailing System 215Postage Statements Summary (SUMMARY)

selecting optional reports 21Publication 401, Guide to the Manifest Mailing

System 216

V

verifying old vs. new parameter records 186viewing defined parameter records 101

W

when mail volume spikes 227withdrawn mail 216

Z

ZIP CodeSequence Detail Report

defining 113Sequence Detail Report (ZSDETAIL)

selecting optional reports 22Zone Summary Report (ZONESUMM)

selecting optional reports 22


Documentation Feedback Form

Contact PreferencesMay we contact you if we have questions about your comments?

Yes

No

Contact Information

Name:

Email:

Phone:

Best time to contact:

CommentsEnter comments here:

Document Title: Document Date:Software Version:Comment regarding page:

mailstream plus™ release 8.3.3 user’s guide for ibm® i systems

Documents